System Manual
SENTRON
Protection devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
11/2013Edition
Answers for Infrastructure & Cities.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
SENTRON
Protection devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit
breakers
System Manual
11/2013
110 0110
- 02 DS 03
About this document
1
Product-specific information
2
Product description
3
Functions
4
Application planning
5
Installing/mounting
6
Connecting
7
Displays and operator
controls
8
Parameter assignment /
addressing
9
Service and maintenance
10
Technical data
11
Dimensional drawings
12
Circuit diagrams
13
Spare parts/accessories
14
Appendix
A
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: 3ZX1012-0VL10-0AC1
Ⓟ
03/2014 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2009.
All rights reserved
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by
personnel qualified
for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 5
Table of contents
1 About this document ............................................................................................................................. 11
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 11
1.2 Technical Support ........................................................................................................................ 11
2 Product-specific information .................................................................................................................. 13
2.1 Important notes ............................................................................................................................ 13
2.2 Ordering data ............................................................................................................................... 15
3 Product description ............................................................................................................................... 17
3.1 Overview 3VL ............................................................................................................................... 17
3.2 Application overview .................................................................................................................... 20
3.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 22
3.3.1 Functional principle ...................................................................................................................... 22
3.3.2 Subdivision according to power ranges ....................................................................................... 22
3.3.3 Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip units ...................................................................................... 23
3.3.4 Electronic overcurrent trip unit (ETU)........................................................................................... 24
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms.............................................................................................. 26
3.4.1 Toggle lever operating mechanism .............................................................................................. 26
3.4.2 Rotary mechanism on front (optional) .......................................................................................... 27
3.4.3 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism (optional) ................................................................. 29
3.4.4 Side panel rotary operating mechanism (optional) ...................................................................... 30
3.5 Motorized operating mechanisms (optional) ................................................................................ 32
3.5.1 Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)..................................... 33
3.5.2 Motorized operating mechanism (MO) ........................................................................................ 34
4 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 35
4.1 Protection functions ..................................................................................................................... 35
4.1.1 Overcurrent release ..................................................................................................................... 35
4.1.2 Function overview of the overcurrent release .............................................................................. 36
4.1.3 Setting options of the overcurrent release ................................................................................... 38
4.1.4 General technical data of the overcurrent release ....................................................................... 40
4.1.5 Differential current protection with RCD module .......................................................................... 44
4.1.6 Single-pole operation with RCD module ...................................................................................... 48
4.1.7 Ground-fault protection ................................................................................................................ 49
4.2 Internal accessories ..................................................................................................................... 51
4.2.1 Possible complements for the insulated accessory compartments ............................................. 51
4.2.2 Undervoltage release ................................................................................................................... 52
4.2.3 Shunt release ............................................................................................................................... 53
4.2.4 Auxiliary switches and alarm switches ......................................................................................... 54
Table of contents
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
6 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
5 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 57
5.1 Use with frequency converters .................................................................................................... 57
5.2 Use of capacitor banks ................................................................................................................ 58
5.3 Transformer protection on the primary side ................................................................................ 59
5.4 Use in DC systems ...................................................................................................................... 60
5.5 Use in IT systems ........................................................................................................................ 62
5.6 Use in motor protection ............................................................................................................... 64
5.7 Use in unusual environments: ..................................................................................................... 67
5.8 Use in series connection ............................................................................................................. 69
5.9 Use in transfer control system .................................................................................................... 71
5.10 Use in communication environment ............................................................................................ 74
6 Installing/mounting ................................................................................................................................ 77
6.1 Installation methods .................................................................................................................... 77
6.2 Mounting and safety clearances ................................................................................................. 80
6.3 Locking devices ........................................................................................................................... 84
6.3.1 Locking devices for a padlock ..................................................................................................... 84
6.3.2 Locking device with a safety lock ................................................................................................ 86
6.3.3 Mutual interlocking of two molded case circuit breakers ............................................................ 86
7 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 89
7.1 Cables and busbars .................................................................................................................... 89
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting ................................................................................... 99
7.3 Main connection methods for plug-in and withdrawable version .............................................. 106
8 Displays and operator controls ............................................................................................................. 109
8.1 Overcurrent trip unit without LCD display ................................................................................. 109
8.2 Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display ...................................................................................... 114
9 Parameter assignment / addressing ..................................................................................................... 119
9.1 Setting the parameters .............................................................................................................. 119
9.2 Setting the protection parameters for motor protection (ETU10M, ETU30M and LCD-ETU
40M) .......................................................................................................................................... 123
10 Service and maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 125
10.1 Preventive measures ................................................................................................................ 125
10.2 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 127
11 Technical data ..................................................................................................................................... 129
11.1 General data - 3VL molded case circuit breakers ..................................................................... 129
11.2 Technical overview .................................................................................................................... 132
11.3 Configuration of main connections ............................................................................................ 136
Table of contents
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 7
11.4 Derating factors .......................................................................................................................... 142
11.4.1 Use at altitudes above 2000 meters .......................................................................................... 142
11.4.2 Use under diverse ambient temperatures .................................................................................. 143
11.5 Power loss .................................................................................................................................. 150
11.6 Capacitor banks ......................................................................................................................... 152
11.7 Motor Protection ......................................................................................................................... 153
11.8 Motorized operating mechanisms .............................................................................................. 156
11.9 RCD modules ............................................................................................................................. 158
11.10 Undervoltage release ................................................................................................................. 159
11.11 Time-delay device for undervoltage releases ............................................................................ 160
11.12 Shunt release ............................................................................................................................. 161
11.13 Auxiliary switches and alarm switches ....................................................................................... 163
11.14 Position signaling switch ............................................................................................................ 164
11.15 Leading auxiliary switches in front-operated rotary operating mechanism ................................ 166
11.16 Ground-fault detection ............................................................................................................... 166
11.17 IP degrees of protection ............................................................................................................. 167
12 Dimensional drawings ......................................................................................................................... 169
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A ............................ 169
12.1.1 Molded case circuit breakers ..................................................................................................... 169
12.1.2 Operating mechanisms .............................................................................................................. 171
12.1.3 Connections and phase barriers ................................................................................................ 174
12.1.4 Terminal covers.......................................................................................................................... 176
12.1.5 Locking device for the toggle lever ............................................................................................ 177
12.1.6 Rear interlocking module ........................................................................................................... 177
12.1.7 Accessories ................................................................................................................................ 178
12.1.8 Door cutouts ............................................................................................................................... 179
12.1.9 Plug-in base and accessories .................................................................................................... 181
12.1.10 VL160X (3VL1), 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A ............................................................................... 183
12.1.10.1 Plug-in base and accessories ............................................................................................... 183
12.1.11 VL160 (3VL) and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A ..................................................... 185
12.1.11.1 Withdrawable version and accessories ................................................................................ 185
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A ................................................................................. 189
12.2.1 Molded case circuit breakers ..................................................................................................... 189
12.2.2 Operating mechanisms .............................................................................................................. 190
12.2.3 Connections and phase barriers ................................................................................................ 194
12.2.4 Terminal covers.......................................................................................................................... 195
12.2.5 Rear interlocking module ........................................................................................................... 196
12.2.6 Locking devices, locking device for toggle lever and accessories ............................................. 196
12.2.7 Door cutouts ............................................................................................................................... 198
12.2.8 Plug-in base and accessories ....................................................................................................
200
Table of contents
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
8 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A ................................................................................ 206
12.3.1 Molded case circuit breakers .................................................................................................... 206
12.3.2 Operating mechanisms ............................................................................................................. 207
12.3.3 Connections and phase barriers ............................................................................................... 210
12.3.4 Terminal covers ......................................................................................................................... 211
12.3.5 Rear interlocking module .......................................................................................................... 212
12.3.6 Locking and locking device for toggle lever .............................................................................. 213
12.3.7 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 213
12.3.8 Door cutouts .............................................................................................................................. 214
12.3.9 Plug-in base and accessories ................................................................................................... 216
12.3.10 Withdrawable version and accessories ..................................................................................... 218
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A ................................................................................ 222
12.4.1 Molded case circuit breakers .................................................................................................... 222
12.4.2 Operating mechanisms ............................................................................................................. 223
12.4.3 Withdrawable version ................................................................................................................ 225
12.4.4 Connections and phase barriers ............................................................................................... 230
12.4.5 Terminal covers ......................................................................................................................... 231
12.4.6 Locking and locking device for toggle lever .............................................................................. 232
12.4.7 Rear interlocking module .......................................................................................................... 233
12.4.8 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 234
12.4.9 Door cutouts .............................................................................................................................. 235
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A ............................................ 237
12.5.1 Molded case circuit breakers .................................................................................................... 237
12.5.2 Operating mechanisms ............................................................................................................. 238
12.5.3 Withdrawable version ................................................................................................................ 240
12.5.4 Connections and phase barriers ............................................................................................... 244
12.5.5 Terminal covers ......................................................................................................................... 245
12.5.6 Rear interlocking module .......................................................................................................... 248
12.5.7 Locking and locking device for toggle lever .............................................................................. 249
12.5.8 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 249
12.5.9 Door cutouts .............................................................................................................................. 250
12.5.10 Current transformer ................................................................................................................... 251
12.6 Interlocks for VL160X (3VL1) to VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A ............................. 252
12.6.1 Locking with bowden wire ......................................................................................................... 252
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A .................................................... 253
12.7.1 Molded case circuit breakers .................................................................................................... 253
12.7.2 Connections and phase barriers ............................................................................................... 254
12.7.3 Terminal covers ......................................................................................................................... 256
12.7.4 Door cutouts .............................................................................................................................. 257
12.7.5 Plug-in base and accessories ................................................................................................... 260
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A .......................... 262
12.8.1 Molded case circuit breakers .................................................................................................... 262
12.8.2 Connections and phase barriers ............................................................................................... 263
12.8.3 Terminal covers ......................................................................................................................... 265
12.8.4 Door cutouts .............................................................................................................................. 267
12.8.5 Plug-in base and accessories ................................................................................................... 269
Table of contents
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 9
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A .................................................... 275
12.9.1 Molded case circuit breakers ..................................................................................................... 275
12.9.2 VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD front connection bar (connections
and interphase barriers) ............................................................................................................. 277
12.9.3 Terminal covers.......................................................................................................................... 279
12.9.4 Door cutouts ............................................................................................................................... 281
12.9.5 Plug-in base and accessories .................................................................................................... 283
12.10 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC ..................................................................... 288
12.11 4NC current transformers for measuring purposes ................................................................... 291
12.12 COM20/COM21 (communication module for SENTRON 3VL) ................................................. 292
13 Circuit diagrams .................................................................................................................................. 293
14 Spare parts/accessories ...................................................................................................................... 303
14.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................. 303
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 307
A.1 Table of abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 307
A.2 Standards and specifications ..................................................................................................... 308
A.3 Comprehensive support from A to Z .......................................................................................... 310
Index................................................................................................................................................... 313
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 11
About this document
1
1.1
Introduction
Purpose of this manual
This manual is intended for reference purposes. The information in this manual enables you
to configure and operate the SENTRON 3VL system.
Audience
This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission and operate
the SENTRON 3VL system.
1.2
Technical Support
You can find further support on the Internet at:
Technical Support (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 13
Product-specific information
2
2.1
Important notes
Validity
This manual applies to SENTRON molded case circuit breakers with the following
designations:
● VL160X
● VL160
● VL250
● VL400
● VL630
● VL800
● VL1250
● VL1600
Standards and certifications
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers comply with the following regulations:
● IEC 60947-2 / DIN EN 60947-2
● IEC 60947-1 / DIN EN 60947-1
● Isolating features in accordance with IEC 60947-2 / DIN EN 60947-2
● As a network disconnecting device (main control switches) according to EN 60204 and
DIN VDE 0113, and additionally also with the requirements for "disconnecting units with
features for stopping and switching off in an emergency" (EMERGENCY-STOP switches)
in conjunction with lockable rotary operating mechanisms (red-yellow) and terminal
covers. Not in conjunction with motorized operating mechanisms.
Operating conditions
Suitable enclosures must be provided for operation in areas with severe ambient conditions
(such as dust, caustic vapors, hazardous gases).
Product-specific information
2.1 Important notes
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
14 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Disclaimer of liability
The products described here were developed to perform safety-oriented functions as part of
an overall installation or machine. A complete safety-oriented system generally features
sensors, evaluation units, signaling units, and reliable shutdown concepts. It is the
responsibility of the manufacturer to ensure that a system or machine is functioning properly
as a whole. Siemens AG, its regional offices, and associated companies (hereinafter referred
to as "Siemens") cannot guarantee all the properties of a whole plant or machine that has
not been designed by Siemens.
Nor can Siemens assume liability for recommendations that appear or are implied in the
following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims beyond the scope of the
Siemens general terms of supply are to be derived or inferred from the following description.
See also
Standards and specifications (Page 308)
Product-specific information
2.2 Ordering data
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 15
2.2
Ordering data
Order number scheme
The table below describes the order number scheme according to which all circuit breakers
can be located and combined to suit the individual application:
Figure 2-1 Overview of the order number system
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 17
Product description
3
3.1
Overview 3VL
3VL molded case circuit breakers are climate-proof. They are designed for operation in
enclosed areas. Suitable enclosures must be provided for operation in areas with severe
ambient conditions (such as dust, caustic vapors, hazardous gases).
SENTRON VL types
The type designations of all available molded case circuit breakers are oriented around the
rated current.
Type designation
Maximum rated current (A)
VL160X / 3VL1
160
VL160 / 3VL2
160
VL250 / 3VL3
250
VL400 / 3VL4
400
VL630 / 3VL5
630
VL800 / 3VL6
800
VL1250 / 3VL7
1250
VL1600 / 3VL8
1600
Product description
3.1 Overview 3VL
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
18 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Rating plate and ID number
The figure shows all the operator elements, setting options and names corresponding to the
precise specified use of the molded case circuit breaker.
(1)
Size specification and switching capacity (N, H or L)
(2)
Molded case circuit breaker type
(3)
Indication of switching capacity
(4)
Rating plate
(5)
Accessories ID fields
(6)
Order number
(7)
Overcurrent setting
(8)
In rated current of the molded case circuit breaker
(9)
Overcurrent release type TM (thermal-magnetic)
(10)
Reference temperature
(11)
Short-circuit release / setting
(12)
Test key
(13)
Toggle lever with 3 positions
(14)
Switching capacity
(15)
Standards
(16)
Accessories cover (removable)
Figure 3-1 3VL molded case circuit breakers - labeling and operator controls
Product description
3.1 Overview 3VL
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 19
SENTRON VL accessories
(1)
Withdrawable/plug-in base
(13)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(2)
Side panels of withdrawable unit
(14)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Phase barriers
(15)
3VL molded case circuit breaker
(4)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
(16)
Internal accessories
(5)
Straight connecting bars
(17)
Electronic trip unit LCD ETU
(6)
Circular conductor terminal for Al / Cu
(18)
Electronic trip unit with communication function
(7)
Box terminal for Cu
(19)
Thermal/magnetic overcurrent release
(8)
Extended terminal cover
(20)
RCD module
(9)
Standard terminal cover
(21)
Rear terminals - flat and round
(10) Masking/cover frame for door cutout (22) COM20 / 21 communication module to the
PROFIBUS DP / MODBUS RTU
(11) Motorized operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism (SEO)
(23)
Battery power supply with test function for electronic trip
units (ETUs)
(12)
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Figure 3-2 SENTRON VL accessories
Product description
3.2 Application overview
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
20 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
3.2
Application overview
The following overview shows the most frequently occurring applications.
Application overview
Application
Type
Description
3- and 4-pole molded case circuit
breakers
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL125
VL1600
System protection
The releases for system protection are designed to protect cables and
non-motorized loads against overload and short-circuit.
3- and 4-pole molded case circuit
breakers
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL125
VL1600
Generator protection
The overload and short-circuit releases can be used for optimized
protection of generators.
3-pole molded case circuit
breakers
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
Motor protection
The overload and short-circuit releases are designed for optimal
protection and direct starting of three-phase AC squirrel-cage motors.
The molded case circuit breakers for motor protection have phase-
failure sensitivity and a thermal image that protects the motor against
overheating. The adjustable time lag class enables users to adjust the
overload release to the startup conditions of the motor to be protected.
Product description
3.2 Application overview
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 21
Application
Type
Description
3-pole molded case circuit
breakers
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
Starter combination
Starter combinations consist of: molded case circuit breaker + contactor
+ overload relay. The molded case circuit breaker handles short-circuit
protection and the isolating function. The contactor has the task of
switching the load feeder normally. The overload relay handles
overload protection that can be specially matched to the motor. The
molded case circuit breaker for starter combination is therefore
equipped with an adjustable and instantaneous short-circuit release.
3- and 4-pole molded case circuit
breakers
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Non-automatic air circuit breakers
These molded case circuit breakers are used as incoming circuit
breakers, main switches or isolating switches without overload
protection. They have fixed short-circuit releases so that back-up fuses
are not necessary.
Product description
3.3 Configuration
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
22 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
3.3
Configuration
3.3.1
Functional principle
Mechanical design
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers have a trip-free mechanism that ensures the trip
process is not prevented even if the operating mechanism is blocked or manually held in the
"ON" position.
The contacts are opened and closed by a toggle lever positioned in the center. This is
attached to the front side on all molded case circuit breakers.
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers are "joint trip units". This means all contacts open or
close simultaneously when the molded case circuit breaker toggle lever is moved from "OFF"
to "ON" or from "ON" to "OFF", or when the tripping mechanism is activated by an
overcurrent or with the help of the auxiliary trips (shunt release or undervoltage release).
Current limiting
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers are designed on the principle of magnetic repulsion of
the contacts. The contacts open before the expected peak-value of the short-circuit current is
reached. Magnetic repulsion of the contacts very considerably reduces the thermal load I2t
as well as the mechanical load resulting from the impulse short-circuit current IP of the
system components that occur during a short-circuit.
You can find more information in the chapter Use in motor protection (Page 64).
3.3.2
Subdivision according to power ranges
VL160X molded case circuit breakers
The most important components of the VL160X molded case circuit breakers are the three
current paths with the incoming and outgoing terminals. The fixed and movable contacts are
arranged in such a way as to guarantee magnetic repulsion of the contacts. In conjunction
with the arcing chambers, a dynamic impedance is generated that causes current limitation.
This reduces the damaging effects of excessively high values I2t and Ip.
The overcurrent release is a factory-installed thermal-magnetic device. It is equipped with
fixed or adjustable overload releases and a fixed short-circuit release in each pole.
To the right and left of the centrally positioned toggle lever of every SENTRON VL molded
case circuit breaker is a double-insulated accessory compartment for installing auxiliary
switches or alarm switches as well as shunt releases and undervoltage releases.
Product description
3.3 Configuration
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 23
VL160 to VL630 molded case circuit breakers
The arrangement of current paths, contact configuration and switch mechanism of the VL160
to VL630 molded case circuit breakers corresponds to that of the VL160X molded case
circuit breaker. The designs diverge with regard to the overcurrent release.
● The overcurrent releases are available in a thermal-magnetic version and in an electronic
version.
● Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases are available with adjustable overload releases
and short-circuit releases.
VL800 to VL1600 molded case circuit breakers
The arrangement of the current paths and switch mechanisms is identical to that of the
VL160X to VL630 molded case circuit breakers.
However, the VL800 to VL1600 molded case circuit breakers are only available in the
version with electronic trip unit. As with all electronic trip units for the SENTRON VL molded
case circuit breakers from Siemens, the current transformers (one per phase) are
accommodated within the overcurrent release enclosure.
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers with electronic trip units measure the actual RMS
current. This method is the most accurate way of measuring currents in electrical distribution
systems with extremely high harmonics.
3.3.3
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip units
A thermal-magnetic overcurrent release consists of two components - a thermal release for
protecting against overload, and a magnetic release for protecting against short-circuit. Both
release components are series-connected.
Thermal release
The thermal release consists of a temperature-dependent bimetal that heats up as a result of
the flow of current. This means the release is current-dependent. The heating of the bimetal
strip depends on the ambient temperature of the molded case circuit breaker. All current
values specified for 3VL for thermal-magnetic releases refer to an ambient temperature of 40
°C. Where ambient temperatures deviate from this, the values in the tables in the chapter
Use at altitudes above 2000 meters (Page 142) are to be used.
Product description
3.3 Configuration
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
24 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Magnetic release
The magnetic release comprises a yoke mounting through which a current path runs, and a
flap armature that is kept at a distance from the yoke mounting by a tension spring. If a
short-circuit current now flows along the current path, the magnetic field thus generated
causes the flap armature to be moved towards the yoke mounting against the opposite force
of the tension spring. The release time is almost current-independent and instantaneous.
The flap armature releases the switching lock and thus opens the switching contacts before
the short-circuit current can reach its maximum; a current limiting effect is thus achieved.
Immediately after release, the flap armature is moved back to its starting position by the
opposite force of the tension spring.
3.3.4
Electronic overcurrent trip unit (ETU)
Electronic trip units (ETUs)
In contrast to thermal-magnetic releases/trip units (TMTUs) where the overcurrent trip is
caused by a bimetal strip or magnetic release, electronic trip units (ETUs) use electronics
with current transformers. The ETU captures the actual currents and compares them with the
default specifications.
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers with electronic overcurrent trips measure the actual
RMS current (true RMS). This is the most accurate method of measuring.
ETUs are available from the VL160 molded case circuit breaker up to and including the
VL1600. The VL800, VL1250 and VL1600 molded case circuit breakers are only available in
the version with electronic trip unit.
Configuration
The electronic overcurrent tripping system consists of:
● 3 to 4 (3-pole or 4-pole) current transformers that also provide their own power supply.
This means an external auxiliary voltage is not required.
● Evaluation electronics with microprocessor
● Tripping solenoid
In all versions with electronic trip units for the 3VL molded case circuit breakers, the current
transformers are located in the same enclosure as the trip unit. At the output of the electronic
overcurrent tripping module, there is a tripping solenoid that trips the molded case circuit
breaker in the event of an overload or short-circuit. In all electronic trip units, the tripping
solenoid is located within the trip unit, except in the shipbuilding ETUs of sizes VL160 and
VL250. In these ETUs, the tripping solenoid is located in the left accessories compartment.
Power supply
The protection functions of the electronic trip unit are guaranteed without additional auxiliary
voltage. The overcurrent releases are supplied with energy via internal current transformers.
The protection function is set via rotary encoding switches on the ETU or via an LCD display.
Product description
3.3 Configuration
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 25
In the case of an LCD display, the electronic trip unit must be activated. This requires a 3-
phase (3-pole) load current of at least 20% or, in the case of a single-phase (single-pole)
load, 30% of the relevant rated current of the molded case circuit breaker. If this load current
is not available, the necessary auxiliary energy can be supplied via a battery power supply
(order no. 3VL9000-8AP01). With communication-capable, molded case circuit breakers, the
trip unit is powered by means of the COM20 or COM21 module.
Battery supply device
The handheld tester for electronic trip units is used as a local test device for the 3VL molded
case circuit breakers with electronic trip unit, and it can be used as an external voltage
supply for the electronic trip units (ETU and LCD-ETU). The portable battery power supply is
fed by two standard 9 V block batteries.
Test function:
● Test tripping
Figure 3-3 Battery supply device
4-pole molded case circuit breakers
The four-pole molded case circuit breakers for system protection can be supplied in all
4 poles with or without current transformers. The trip units in the 4th pole (N) can be set to
50% or 100% of the current in the 3 main current paths dependent on the size, so that safe
protection of the neutral conductor can be guaranteed even with a reduced cross-section. In
the case of LCD-ETUs, the neutral conductor protection can be adjusted in steps from 50%
to 100% or switched off.
Product description
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
26 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
3.4
Mechanical operating mechanisms
3.4.1
Toggle lever operating mechanism
In the basic version, the 3VL molded case circuit breakers have a toggle lever as actuator,
which is also an indicator of the switching position. The "Tripped" position is also displayed in
addition to the "ON" and "OFF" positions.
The toggle lever goes to the "tripped" position when the internal trip mechanism is activated
by an overcurrent situation, e.g. overload or short-circuit, or if the Test key is operated.
Activation by an undervoltage release or shunt release will also cause the toggle lever to
move to the "Tripped" position.
The toggle lever must be returned to the "OFF/RESET" position before the molded case
circuit breaker can be activated again. This enables the internal release mechanism to be
reset. 3VL molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever operation comply with the "Network
disconnecting device" condition (5.3.2 Section c) and 5.3.3) according to DIN EN 60204-1
(VDE 0113-1) in conjunction with a locking device.
Toggle lever positions
OFF
RESET
Tripped
Toggle lever positions
Product description
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 27
Toggle lever extension
Toggle lever extensions enable user-friendly operation of the molded case circuit breaker
toggle lever.
● VL160X to VL250: toggle lever extension not necessary / not available
● VL400 to VL800: possible as option
● VL1250 to VL1600: included in the scope of supply / optional installation
Toggle lever extension
Use of toggle lever extension
3.4.2
Rotary mechanism on front (optional)
The front-operated rotary operating mechanism converts the vertical movement of the toggle
lever into rotary motion. The molded case circuit breaker is switched on/off or tripped with
the help of the front-operated rotary operating mechanism. The rotary motion on the
switching knob is converted to vertical motion on the toggle lever.
Rotary mechanism
The front
-operated rotary operating mechanism is mounted directly
on the molded case circuit breaker. 3VL
molded case circuit
breakers with rotary mechanism comply with the "Network
disconnecting device" conditi
on of DIN EN 60204-1 (DIN VDE 0113
-
1).
Product description
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
28 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Degree of protection
The front-operated rotary operating mechanism has degree of protection IP30.
Interlocking
Lockable in the "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks.
A safety lock can also be used.
Application
Standard application:
● Black knob
● Gray indicator plate
Network disconnecting device with features for stopping and shutting down in an emergency:
● Red knob
● Yellow indicator plate
Accessories
Optionally, up to 4 changeover contacts can be used. Two contacts can be used as leading
NO contacts and two contacts as leading NC contacts. These are equipped with 1.5 m long
connection cables.
Product description
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 29
3.4.3
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism (optional)
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanism is available for installation in control cabinets
and distribution boards.
Door
-coupling rotary operating
mechanism
3VL
molded case circuit breakers with door-coupling rotary
mechanism comply with the "Network disconnecting
device" con
dition of DIN EN 60204-1 (DIN VDE 0113-1)
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanism is designed as follows:
● Rotary mechanism on the front with shaft stub (without knob)
● Shaft coupling
● 300 mm extension shaft (600 mm optional, retaining bracket required)
● Actuator
Degree of protection
This mechanism offers degree of protection IP65.
Interlocking
Lockable in the "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks. A safety lock can also be used.
Application
Standard application:
● Black knob
● Gray indicator plate
Network disconnecting device with features for stopping and shutting down in an emergency:
● Red knob
● Yellow indicator plate
Product description
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
30 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Accessories
Leading auxiliary switches when switching ON and OFF
The leading auxiliary switches (changeover switches) are available as accessories for front-
operated rotary operating mechanisms and door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms.
The following applications are possible:
● Leading auxiliary switch for switching from "ON" to "OFF"
● Leading auxiliary switch for switching from "OFF" to "ON"
Each version, leading auxiliary switch for switching on and off, can be equipped with one or
two changeover switches. The connecting cables of the auxiliary switches are 1.5 m long.
Figure 3-4 Rotary operating mechanism with leading auxiliary switches
3.4.4
Side panel rotary operating mechanism (optional)
The side panel rotary operating mechanism is available for installation in control cabinets
and distribution boards.
Product description
3.4 Mechanical operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 31
Interlocking
Lockable in the "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks.
Figure 3-5 Side panel rotary operating mechanism
The side panel rotary operating mechanism is structured as follows:
● Rotary mechanism on the front with shaft stub (without knob)
● Bowden wire operation on the switch
● 2 Bowden wires
● Bowden wire operation for panel-mounting (side panel of the distribution board)
● Actuator
Product description
3.5 Motorized operating mechanisms (optional)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
32 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Application
Standard application:
● Black knob
● Gray indicator plate
Network disconnecting device with features for stopping and shutting down in an emergency:
● Red knob
● Yellow indicator plate
Accessories
Leading auxiliary switches when switching ON and OFF
The leading auxiliary switches (changeover switches) are available as accessories for side
panel rotary operating mechanisms.
The following applications are possible:
● Leading auxiliary switch for switching from "ON" to "OFF"
● Leading auxiliary switch for switching from "OFF" to "ON"
Each version, leading auxiliary switch for switching on and off, can be equipped with one or
two changeover switches. The connecting cables of the auxiliary switches are 1.5 m long.
3.5
Motorized operating mechanisms (optional)
Motorized operating mechanisms enable the molded case circuit breaker to be switched
on/off locally or by remote control. For electrical and mechanical locking of the operating
mechanism, they are equipped as standard with a locking device for padlocks.
The motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO) can be optionally
equipped with a cylinder lock for locking in the OFF position.
Motorized operating mechanisms can also be actuated manually. Two types of mechanisms
are offered.
Note
molded
case circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanisms
cannot
be used as
network disconnecting devices in accordance with DIN
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113-1).
Product description
3.5 Motorized operating mechanisms (optional)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 33
3.5.1
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
SEO for VL160X-VL800
● The motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO) is suitable for
synchronization tasks.
● The motor charges a motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism and
moves the SENTRON VL toggle lever to the "OFF/RESET" position.
● The motorized operating mechanism with stored energy operate discharges when
actuated, quickly switching the SENTRON VL toggle lever to the "ON" position.
● A mode switch allows local (Manual) or remote (Auto) operation to be selected.
● The manual actuator handle is located on the front of the operating mechanism cover.
Figure 3-6 Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
Product description
3.5 Motorized operating mechanisms (optional)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
34 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
3.5.2
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Motorized operating mechanism for VL160x-VL1600
The motorized operating mechanism (MO) is required for remote switching of molded case
circuit breakers. Thanks to its fast break time, it is perfectly suited to transfer control
systems.
The integrated switch position indicator of the motorized operating mechanism (MO)
indicates the ON, OFF and TRIP states.
The LOCAL, MANUAL or AUTO modes can be selected with the mode switch:
LOCAL
Operation using pushbuttons on-site
MANUAL
Manual operation with the help of an A
llen key on the front of the motorized
operating mechanism (MO)
AUTO
Remote control via control wire
Note
The Allen key for manual operation is located on the front of the device.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 35
Functions
4
4.1
Protection functions
4.1.1
Overcurrent release
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers are designed on the principle of magnetic repulsion of
the contacts. The contacts open before the expected peak-value of the short-circuit current is
reached. Magnetic repulsion of the contacts very considerably reduces the thermal load I2t
as well as the mechanical load resulting from the impulse short-circuit current Ip of the
system components that occur during a short-circuit.
(1)
Main connections
(2)
Breaker mechanism
(3)
Overcurrent release
(4)
Movable contact arm
(5)
Arc chute
(6)
Enclosure
Figure 4-1 Interior view MCCB
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
36 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
4.1.2
Function overview of the overcurrent release
VL160 to VL1600
Table 4- 1 Meaning of symbols
✓
Function available
—
Function not available
Table 4- 2 Function overview
Order No.
supplement
Releases
System
protection
System /
generator
protection
Motor
protection
Starter
protection
Non-automatic
circuit breakers
Function
Release type
DK
M
—
—
—
✓
—
I
DE
M
—
—
—
—
✓
I
EE
M
—
—
—
—
✓
I
DA
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
DD
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
DC
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
EH
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
EJ
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
EA
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LIN
EC
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LIN
EM
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
—
LIN
SP
ETU10M
3)
—
—
✓
—
—
LI
MP
ETU10M
3)
—
—
✓
—
—
LI
SB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
MB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
LB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
TA
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LIN
NA ETU10 ✓ — — — — LIN
LA
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LIN
TB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
NB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
—
LI
SL
ETU12
✓
—
—
—
—
LIG
ML
ETU12
✓
—
—
—
—
LIG
SF
ETU12
✓
—
—
—
—
LIG
MF
ETU12
✓
—
—
—
—
LIG
TN
ETU12
✓
—
—
—
—
LING
NN
ETU12
✓
—
—
—
—
LING
SE
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSI
ME
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSI
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 37
Order No.
supplement
Releases
System
protection
System /
generator
protection
Motor
protection
Starter
protection
Non-automatic
circuit breakers
Function
Release type
LE
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSI
TE
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSI
NE
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSI
TF
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIN
NF
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIN
LF
ETU20
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIN
SG
ETU22
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIG
MG
ETU22
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIG
SH
ETU22
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIG
MH
ETU22
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIG
TH
ETU22
—
✓
—
—
—
LSING
NH
ETU22
—
✓
—
—
—
LSING
SS
ETU30M
3)
—
—
✓
—
—
LI
MS
ETU30M
3)
—
—
✓
—
—
LI
LS
ETU30M
3)
—
—
✓
—
—
LI
UP
LCD-ETU40M
3)
—
—
✓
—
—
LI
UH LCD-ETU40 — ✓ — — — LI, LS, LSI
UJ
LCD-ETU40
—
✓
—
—
—
LI, LSI, LIN, LSIN
UL LCD-ETU42 — ✓ — — — LSIG
UM
LCD-ETU42
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIG
UN
LCD-ETU42
—
✓
—
—
—
LSIG, LSING
1)
Size dependent
2)
TM to In = 630 A
3)
Motor protection to In = 500 A
L: Long time delay
S: Short time delay
I: Instantaneous
N: Neutral protection
G: Ground fault
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
38 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
4.1.3
Setting options of the overcurrent release
VL160 to VL1600
In view of the large number of setting options of the individual overcurrent releases, an
overview in table form is useful for calculating the optimal operating point.
Table 4- 3 Overcurrent tripping method - setting options
Order No.
supplement
Releases
Setting options
L
S1)
I1)
G
Overload
protection
Short-circuit protection
(short-time delayed)
Short-circuit
protection
(instantaneous)
Ground-fault protection
Ir = x In
Isd = x Ir
tsd [s]
Ii = x In
Ig = In
tg [s]
DK
M
5)
—
—
—
7 ... 15
—
—
DE
M
5)
—
—
—
8 … 18
—
—
EE
M
5)
—
—
—
8 … 18
—
—
DA
TM
2)5)
1
—
—
9 … 18
4)
—
—
DD
TM
2)5)
0,8 ... 1
—
—
9 … 18
4)
—
—
DC
TM
2)5)
0,8 ... 1
—
—
5 ... 10
—
—
EH
TM
2)5)
1
—
—
9 … 18
4)
—
—
EJ
TM
2)5)
0,8 ... 1
—
—
5 ... 10
—
—
EA
TM
2)5)
1
—
—
9 … 18
4)
—
—
EC
TM
2)5)
0,8 ... 1
—
—
5 ... 10
—
—
EM
TM
2)5)
0,8 ... 1
—
—
5 ... 10
—
—
SP
ETU10M
3)
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
MP
ETU10M
3)
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
SB
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
MB
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
LB
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
TA
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
NA ETU10 0,4 ... 1 — — 1,25 ... 11 — —
LA
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
TB
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
NB
ETU10
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
SL
ETU12
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
ML
ETU12
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
SF
ETU12
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
MF
ETU12
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
TN
ETU12
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
NN
ETU12
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
SE
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
ME
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 39
Order No.
supplement
Releases
Setting options
L
S1)
I1)
G
Overload
protection
Short-circuit protection
(short-time delayed)
Short-circuit
protection
(instantaneous)
Ground-fault protection
Ir = x In
Isd = x Ir
tsd [s]
Ii = x In
Ig = In
tg [s]
LE
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
TE
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
NE
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
TF
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
NF
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
LF
ETU20
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
—
—
SG
ETU22
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
MG
ETU22
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
SH
ETU22
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
MH
ETU22
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
TH
ETU22
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
NH
ETU22
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
11
0.6 ... 1, OFF
0,1 … 0,3
SS
ETU30M
3)
0,4 ... 1
—
—
06.08.2011
—
—
MS
ETU30M
3)
0,4 ... 1
—
—
06.08.2011
—
—
LS
ETU30M
3)
0,4 ... 1
—
—
06.08.2011
—
—
UP
LCD-ETU40M
3)
0,4 ... 1
—
—
1,25 ... 11
—
—
UH
LCD-ETU40
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
1,25 ... 11
—
—
UJ LCD-ETU40 0,4 ... 1 1,5 ... 10 0 ... 0,5 1,25 ... 11 — —
UL
LCD-ETU42
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
1,25 ... 11
0,4 ... 1
0,1 ... 0,5
UM
LCD-ETU42
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
1,25 ... 11
0,4 ... 1
0,1 ... 0,5
UN
LCD-ETU42
0,4 ... 1
1,5 ... 10
0 ... 0,5
1,25 ... 11
0,4 ... 1
0,1 ... 0,5
1) Size dependent
2) TM to In = 630 A
3) Motor protection to In = 500 A
4) Fixed
5) With single-pole load, tripping occurs at 130% of the set instantaneous short-circuit
current.
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
40 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
4.1.4
General technical data of the overcurrent release
VL160 to VL1600
Table 4- 4 Meaning of symbols
✓
Function available
—
Function not available
Order No.
supplement
Releases
Thermal
image
Phase
failure
Communication
capability
4)
Ground-
fault
protection
Number of
poles
N pole
protected
1)
DK
M
—
—
—
—
3
—
DE
M
—
—
—
—
3
—
EE
M
—
—
—
—
4
—
DA
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
3
—
DD
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
3
—
DC
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
3
—
EH
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
4
—
EJ
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
4
—
EA
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
4
100 %
EC
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
4
60 %
EM
TM
2)
✓
—
—
—
4
100 %
SP ETU10M 3) ✓ 40% IR — — 3 —
MP
ETU10M
3)
✓
40% I
R
✓
—
3
—
SB ETU10 ✓ — — — 3 —
MB
ETU10
✓
—
✓
—
3
—
LB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
3
—
TA
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
4
50 / 100 %
NA
ETU10
✓
—
✓
—
4
50 / 100 %
LA
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
4
50 / 100 %
TB
ETU10
✓
—
—
—
4
—
NB
ETU10
✓
—
✓
—
4
—
SL ETU12 ✓ — —
①
3 —
ML ETU12 ✓ — ✓
①
3 —
SF ETU12 ✓ — —
②
3 —
MF ETU12 ✓ — ✓
②
3 —
TN ETU12 ✓ — —
②
4 50 / 100 %
NN ETU12 ✓ — ✓
②
4 50 / 100 %
SE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
3
—
ME
ETU20
✓
—
✓
—
3
—
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 41
LE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
3
—
TE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
4
—
NE
ETU20
✓
—
✓
—
4
—
TF
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
4
50 / 100 %
NF
ETU20
✓
—
✓
—
4
50 / 100 %
LF
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
4
50 / 100 %
SG ETU22 ✓ -— —
①
3 —
MG ETU22 ✓ — ✓
①
3 —
SH ETU22 ✓ — —
②
3 —
MH ETU22 ✓ — ✓
②
3 —
TH ETU22 ✓ — — ② 4 50 / 100 %
NH ETU22 ✓ — ✓
②
4 50 / 100 %
SS
ETU30M
3)
✓
40% IR
—
—
3
—
MS
ETU30M
3)
✓
40% I
R
✓
—
3
—
LS
ETU30M
3)
✓
40% I
R
—
—
3
—
UP
LCD-ETU40M
3)
✓
5 to 50% IR
✓
—
3
—
UH
LCD-ETU40
✓
—
✓
—
3
—
UJ LCD-ETU40 ✓ — ✓ — 4 50 … 100%, OFF
UL LCD-ETU42 ✓ — ✓
①
3 —
UM LCD-ETU42 ✓ — ✓
①
/
③
3 —
UN LCD-ETU42 ✓ — ✓
②
4 50 … 100%, OFF
1)
Size dependent
2)
TM to In = 630 A
3)
Motor protection to In = 500 A
4) With COM20/COM21
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
42 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Further information on ①, ② and ③
Further information for ①, ② and ③ can be found in chapter:
Ground-fault protection (Page 49)
Table 4- 5 Image references for ①, ② and ③
No.
Meaning
Information in image
① Vectorial summation current formation
(3-conductor system)
• "Molded case circuit breaker in balanced systems"
② Vectorial summation current formation
(4-conductor system)
• "3-
pole molded case circuit breaker, current transformer in neutral
conductor current"
• "4-pole molded case circuit breaker, current transformer installed
internally"
③ Direct recording of the ground-fault current
at the neutral point of the transformer
• "3-pole molded case circuit breaker, current transformer at the
grounded neutral point of the transformer"
Table 4- 6 General data II
Order No.
supplement
Releases
I2t
(ON/OFF)
Trip class (tC)
Time-lag
class (tR)
Thermal-
magnetic
release
Magnetic
release
Electronic
trip unit
LCD
display
DK
M
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
DE
M
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
EE
M
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
DA
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
DD
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
DC
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
EH
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
EJ
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
EA
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
EC
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
EM
TM
2)
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
SP
ETU10M
3)
—
10
—
—
—
✓
—
MP
ETU10M
3)
—
10
—
—
—
✓
—
SB ETU10 — — 2.5 ... 30 — — ✓ —
MB
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
LB
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
TA
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
NA
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
LA
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
TB
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
NB
ETU10
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
SL
ETU12
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
ML
ETU12
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 43
Order No.
supplement
Releases
I2t
(ON/OFF)
Trip class (tC)
Time-lag
class (tR)
Thermal-
magnetic
release
Magnetic
release
Electronic
trip unit
LCD
display
SF
ETU12
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
MF
ETU12
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
TN
ETU12
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
NN
ETU12
—
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
—
SE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
ME
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
LE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
TE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
NE
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
TF
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
NF
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
LF
ETU20
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
SG
ETU22
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
MG
ETU22
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
SH
ETU22
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
MH
ETU22
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
TH ETU22 ✓ — — — — ✓ —
NH
ETU22
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
—
SS ETU30M 3) — 10, 20, 30 — — ✓ —
MS
ETU30M
3)
—
10, 20, 30
—
—
—
✓
—
LS
ETU30M
3)
—
10, 20, 30
—
—
—
✓
—
UP
LCD-ETU40M
3)
—
5, 10, 15, 20, 30
—
—
—
✓
✓
UH
LCD-ETU40
✓
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
✓
UJ
LCD-ETU40
✓
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
✓
UL
LCD-ETU42
✓
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
✓
UM
LCD-ETU42
✓
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
✓
UN
LCD-ETU42
✓
—
2.5 ... 30
—
—
✓
✓
2)
TM to In = 630 A
3) Motor protection to In = 500 A
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
44 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
4.1.5
Differential current protection with RCD module
The molded case circuit breaker with differential current protection is very often used to implement a
double function:
● Protection of systems against overload and short-circuit currents.
● Protection of cables and electrical equipment against damage from ground faults.
The SENTRON VL RCD modules are offered as accessories for the VL160X, VL160, VL250
and VL400 molded case circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases. This
combination is called molded case circuit breaker with differential current protection of
type A. Type A means tripping is guaranteed both in the case of faults in sinusoidal
alternating currents and in the case of faults in pulsating direct currents. These units have an
adjustable trip time delay ∆t. The values for the rated fault current I∆n can also be adjusted.
In a fault-free system, the sum of the currents in the summation current transformer of the
RCD module is zero. A ground fault current occurring in the circuit as the result of an
insulation fault produces a differential current that induces a voltage in the secondary
winding of the current transformer. The evaluation electronics monitors the induced voltage
and transmit a trip command to the RCD trip unit if the trip criterion is met. The molded case
circuit breaker with differential current protection combination is designed to open he molded
case circuit breaker contacts if the differential current reaches a specific value.
Note
The RCD module can only be combined with 3VL molded case circuit breakers with thermal
-
magnetic overcurrent release. I
t cannot be combined with a molded case circuit breaker with
ETU.
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 45
Standard features
● Mechanical trip display:
The Reset button on the RCD pops out when the RCD module trips the molded case circuit
breaker.
● Reset button:
This must be manually reset after the molded case circuit breaker has been tripped by the
RCD module. The molded case circuit breaker can only be reset and switched on again after
the RCD module has been reset.
● Cover:
Modifiable settings for ∆t and I∆n.
A sealable transparent cover is available for preventing modification.
● The RCD module has three LEDs:
– Green LED flashes: "Active" -> indicates that the RCD module is functional
– Yellow LED flashes: The fault current is between 25% < I∆< 50% of the set I∆n value
– Red LED flashes: The fault current I∆ is greater than 50% of the set I∆n value
● Test button:
The functionality of the RCD module is checked with the test button. If the test button is
pressed, differential current is simulated on a test winding attached to the summation current
transformer. When functioning correctly, the RCD module must trip the molded case circuit
breaker.
The test button must be pressed for at least the set delay time Δt.
● A line disconnector:
– makes it possible to disconnect the evaluation electronics of the RCD module from the
circuit without removing the primary cable or the busbars (e.g. before insulation tests).
– Limitation of the maximum RMS withstand voltage to an RMS value of 3500 V AC for
this feature, i.e. the RMS value of the voltage for max. 60 seconds for one insulation
test must not exceed 3500 V.
● Protection function from 50 V AC between phase and neutral conductor
● The RCD module has a surge current withstand capability of Ipeak = 2000 A. The standard
surge wave is defined as 8 / 20-µs waveform.
● The RCD module does not trip in the case of making currents.
Δt ≥ 0 Irms = 3000 A
Δt ≥ 60ms Ipeak = 20 x In x √2
● The molded case circuit breaker with differential current protection combination can be
supplied from both sides.
● Matching molded case circuit breaker standard accessories – covers, phase barriers, wire
connectors.
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
46 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Special features of the VL160X
● The molded case circuit breaker is tripped via an electromagnetic trip relay installed in the
breaker accessories compartment to the left of the toggle lever. The trip unit in the
molded case circuit breaker is connected to the RCD module and receives a trip
command when the preset fault currents are reached.
● Internal accessories can still be installed to the right of the toggle lever.
● The Reset button functions in exactly the same way as on the RCD modules VL160 to
400 and is accessible via the molded case circuit breaker accessories cover supplied with
this module.
Note
Motorized operating mechanism with stored ener
gy mechanisms and rotary operating
mechanisms cannot be installed with this product.
Special features of VL160, VL250, VL400
● The molded case circuit breaker is tripped by means of a direct-acting tappet from the
RCD module to the system protection switch. The electromagnetic trip unit is integrated in
the RCD module.
● The Reset button pops out beyond the surface of the RCD module cover to indicate that
the RCD module has tripped the system protection switch. This unit prevents the system
protection switch contacts from closing before the Reset button of the RCD module has
been manually reset.
● This has the same design as the system protection switch accessories including the
accessories for external operating mechanisms as well as for fixed-mounted assembly,
plug-in assembly and withdrawable assembly.
● An auxiliary switch (changeover contact) is available. The contacts change status when
the RCD module trips the system protection switch.
● Remote tripping is supported. The customer connects a switch (NO contact) to terminals
X13.1 and X13.3 via a twisted-pair cable. The switching contact must have a minimum
switching capacity of 5 V/1 mA (e.g. SIEMENS 3SB3). If the NO contact is actuated, the
RCD module trips. The connection terminals X13.1 and X13.3 are galvanically isolated
from the system by means of a transformer (functional extra low voltage, FELV). The
maximum trip time of the molded case circuit breaker with differential current protection is
50 ms regardless of the set trip time delay Δt. In special cases, such as routing of the
cable outside, ensure by means of suitable cable routing or protection measures that the
amplitude of overvoltages (e.g. overvoltages due to thunderstorms) between the
conductor and ground is limited to 2.5 kV.
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 47
Special requirements
● Every RCD module requires a separate cable for remote tripping. It is not possible to use
one cable and connect two or more RCD modules in parallel. It is possible to use two or
more switches in parallel for remote tripping of an RCD module.
● Use an unshielded or shielded twisted-pair cable with a maximum capacitance of 36 nF
as well as a maximum resistance of 50 Ohms (total length = out and back).
● With a shielded cable, the shield must not be applied to the PE conductor of the system.
● A separate conductor must connect terminal X13.2 with the ground busbar (E or PE).
This connection is recommended for the prevention of electrostatic charge on the remote
tripping cable. This applies in particular when long cables (> 10 m) are used. If this is not
the case, the remote tripping cable is isolated.
Design of the RCD module
VL160X with RCD module I
VL160 with RCD module
①
Reset
Figure 4-2 RCD module for VL160
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
48 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
4.1.6
Single-pole operation with RCD module
Connection of the RCD module for single-pole operation
All 3-pole or 4-pole molded case circuit breakers with RCD module can be operated with 2
poles (L to N), since the power supply of the RCD module is supplied from all three external
conductors, and on 4-pole devices additionally from the N conductor.
Apart from the test current circuit, the RCD module is unrestricted in functionality if at least 2
conductors are connected.
When connecting the RCD module, you only have to ensure that the test current circuit
connected to current path 1-2 and 3-4 (marking) is functioning or is supplied with power.
The following connections are possible in 2-pole operation:
2-pole operation with a 3-pole molded case circuit breaker
● Connection of the network to current path 1-2 and 3-4 (any incoming supply side)
Figure 4-3 3-pole RCD
Note
Single-pole load
Series connectio
n of the current paths is not necessary in the case of single-pole load.
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 49
2-pole operation with 4-pole molded case circuit breakers
● Connection of the network to current path 1-2 and 3-4 (any incoming supply side) or
● connection of the network to current path 1-2 and N; however, a jumper is required here
from N to current path 3-4 (on the input or output side)
Figure 4-4 4-pole RCD
4.1.7
Ground-fault protection
Ground fault trip "G" (ground fault overcurrent protection) captures fault currents flowing to
ground that can cause fires in the plant.
Several molded case circuit breakers connected in series can be assigned time-graded
discrimination by means of the adjustable delay time. The delays can be reduced to 100 ms
by using a ZSI system.
Measurement method 1: Vectorial summation current formation
Ground fault detection in balanced systems
The three phase currents are evaluated using vectorial summation current formation.
Figure 4-5 molded case circuit breaker in balanced system
Functions
4.1 Protection functions
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
50 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Ground fault detection in unbalanced systems
The neutral conductor current is measured directly. Only the ground-fault current is
measured for the 3-pole circuit breakers. In the case of the 4-pole circuit breakers, the
neutral conductor overload protection is also measured.
The overcurrent release calculates the ground-fault current using the vectorial summation of
the three phase currents and the neutral conductor current.
The 4th current transformer of the neutral conductor is installed internally in the case of 4-
pole molded case circuit breakers.
Figure 4-6 3-pole molded case circuit breaker, current transformer in neutral conductor current
Figure 4-7 4-pole molded case circuit breaker, current transformer installed internally
Measurement method 2: Direct detection of the ground-fault current via a current transformer in the
grounded neutral point of the transformer
The current transformer is installed direct in the grounded neutral point of the transformer.
Figure 4-8 3-pole molded case circuit breaker, current transformer in the grounded neutral point of
the transformer
Functions
4.2 Internal accessories
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 51
4.2
Internal accessories
4.2.1
Possible complements for the insulated accessory compartments
Figure 4-9 Possible complements for the insulated accessory compartments
Functions
4.2 Internal accessories
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
52 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Note
ETU with communication 3-pole (3VL_7__-_M*) or 4-pole (3VL_7__-_N*)
If a communication
-capable ETU is used, the left-hand accessory compartment X2 contains
an auxiliary switch and an alarm switch.
Note
Max. no. of contact blocks
Maximum 6
contact blocks (HS) per molded case circuit breaker VL160X to VL400
Maximum 8
contact blocks (HS) per molded case circuit breaker VL630 to VL1600
4.2.2
Undervoltage release
Molded case circuit breaker with undervoltage release
If there is no voltage present, closing of the molded case circuit breaker is not possible. If
voltage is not applied to the releases, operation of the circuit breaker will result in no-load
switching.
Undervoltage release
The undervoltage release trips the molded
case circuit breaker when the voltage
fails.
Tripping can occur within a voltage range of
0.7 to 0.35
x US. Tripping occurs under
0.35
x US. Re-closure of the molded case
circuit breaker contacts is only possible once
the voltage has reached a value of 0.85 to
1.1
x US. Undervoltage releases can be
installed for electronic locking.
Undervoltage releases are installed in the right accessory compartment of the 3VL molded
case circuit breakers.
Functions
4.2 Internal accessories
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 53
4.2.3
Shunt release
Molded case circuit breaker with shunt release
The molded case circuit breaker with shunt release is used for remote protection. The shunt
release is used for remote tripping of the molded case circuit breaker. The molded case
circuit breaker is tripped by applying the operating voltage at the shunt release.
Shunt release
It is designed for short
-time operation and is therefore
equipped with an interrupt contact for self
-
protection. Shunt
releases are installed in the right accessory compartment of
the 3VL molded case circuit breakers.
Functions
4.2 Internal accessories
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
54 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
4.2.4
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Auxiliary and alarm switches are used to indicate the switching status of the molded case circuit
breaker
Auxiliary switches show the position of the main contacts ("ON" or "OFF").
Alarm switches transmit a signal when the molded case circuit breaker trips due to a short-
circuit or overcurrent, or when the shunt release, undervoltage release, test button, or RCD
module trips.
Family 1
Family 2
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Leading auxiliary switches when switching ON and OFF
The leading auxiliary switches (changeover switches) are available as accessories for front-
operated rotary operating mechanisms and door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms.
The following applications are possible:
Leading auxiliary switch for switching from "ON" to
"OFF"
Leading auxiliary switch for switching f
rom "OFF" to
"ON"
Each version, leading auxiliary switch for switching
on and off, can be equipped with one or two
changeover switches. The connecting cables of the
auxiliary switches are 1.5 m long.
Leading auxiliary switch when switching from "OFF" to "ON" (leading NO contact)
Functions
4.2 Internal accessories
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 55
Application example:
If the molded case circuit breaker is equipped with an undervoltage release, and the leading
auxiliary switch is installed in the rotary operating mechanism, the leading NO contacts make
it possible to supply the undervoltage release with power before the main contacts can be
closed.
Leading auxiliary switch for switching off (leading NC contact)
Application example:
In applications with thyristors, it is necessary to reset the power electronics of the converter
before the main circuit is switched off.
Molded case circuit breakers with leading auxiliary switches create a leading signal that
enables selective deceleration of the thyristor.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 57
Application planning
5
5.1
Use with frequency converters
Combination of frequency converter and 3VL molded case circuit breaker
3VL molded case circuit breakers can be used as protection devices on the primary side in
systems in which frequency converters, variable-speed drives, and electronic motor control
devices are used. The thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units of the 3VL molded case
circuit breakers can be used in these applications. On account of RMS measurement, the
SENTRON VL trip units are not influenced by harmonics.
Figure 5-1 Frequency converters
Note
Alternative circuit breakers
SIRIUS
3RV circuit breakers can also be used for applications up to approximately 45 kW .
SIRIUS soft starters and 3VL molded case circuit breakers
For more detailed information, please refer to the soft starter catalogs and the selection
guides.
Visit our site on the Internet at:
Soft starter (http://www.siemens.de/sanftstarter)
Frequency converters / variable-speed drives and 3VL molded case circuit breakers
Please refer to the relevant catalogs for information on the new SINAMICS series,
MICROMASTER 4, and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Application planning
5.2 Use of capacitor banks
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
58 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
5.2
Use of capacitor banks
Capacitor banks are used, for example, for reactive power compensation. In reactive power
compensation, also called power factor correction, the undesired reactive power of loads in
AC systems is reduced. Reactive power compensation is usually performed by
compensating inductive reactive power with capacitive load.
A combination of fixed and central compensations are used depending on the design of the
low-voltage system and the loads involved.
Molded case circuit breaker for protecting and switching capacitor banks
According to the relevant standards DIN VDE 0560 Part 41 / EN 60831-1 / IEC 70,
capacitors must operate under normal operating conditions with the current's RMS value
being up to 1.3 times the rated current of the capacitor. In addition, a further tolerance of up
to 15% of the real value of the power must be taken into consideration.
The maximum current with which the selected molded case circuit breaker can be constantly
loaded, and which it must also be able to switch, is calculated as follows:
IN max = IN x 1.5 (RMS value, RMS current)
Important values for selecting the molded case circuit breaker
More detailed information in the technical data: Capacitor banks (Page 152)
Abbr.
Designation
Q
n
Capacitor bank rated power in kVA
UN
Rated voltage of the capacitor
I
N
Rated current of the capacitor bank
IN max
Maximum expected rated current
I
i
Value for setting the instantaneous short-circuit release
IR
Value for setting the inverse-time delayed overload release
The following applies:
IN = QN / (√3 x UN)
IR = INmax = IN x 1.5
Ii> 9 x IR (minimum)
Application planning
5.3 Transformer protection on the primary side
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 59
5.3
Transformer protection on the primary side
The molded case circuit breaker as transformer protection on the primary side
When switching on low-voltage AC transformers, the extremely high inrush current peaks
place special demands on the trip unit or on the making capacity of the molded case circuit
breakers if these are also used to switch the transformer.
For most applications, an inrush current of 20 to 30 times the rated operating current is
expected in practice and must be taken into account when selecting the molded case circuit
breakers.
The maximum short-circuit current Ik of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers is 11 x In (rated
current). A molded case circuit breaker in the lower setting range must therefore be used for
transformer protection on the primary side.
Example: A transformer with 500 A rated current; 20 times the inrush current
Selected: ETU with In = 1000 A; setting range 0.4 - 1 x In = 400 A to 1000 A
50% of In = 500 A; Ii = 11 x In = 1000 A x 11 = 11000 A = 22 x current setting
Note
Disconnection of molded case circuit breaker
It is imperative to ensure that the minimum short
-circuit current Ikmin in accordance with
VDE
0100 can be disconnected using a protection facility (e.g. molded case circuit breaker).
The 3VL molded case circuit breaker can be disconnected using the short-time-delayed
short-circuit release (S), e.g. a 3VL with an ETU20, where it is possible to set the delay time
to up to 500 ms depending on the duration of the inrush current.
The short delay "bridges" the inrush current peak and the short-circuit protection can then
respond at low current values after a delay.
CAUTION
Molded case circuit breaker with phase failure protection
Molded case circuit breakers with phase failure protection must not be used. Their trip units
have protection against unbalanced network load which cannot be deactivated and can
lead to unintentional trips.
Application planning
5.4 Use in DC systems
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
60 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
5.4
Use in DC systems
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers 160X to VL630 with thermal overload and magnetic
short-circuit trip units (TMTU) are suitable for use in DC systems.
The 3VL 160 to VL1600 molded case circuit breakers with electronic trip units (ETUs) are
not
suitable for switching DC.
Selection criteria for molded case circuit breakers
The following are the most important criteria for selecting the optimal molded case circuit
breaker for protecting a DC system:
● The rated current determines the size of the molded case circuit breaker.
● The rated voltage determines the number of series-connected poles required for breaking
- 3 or 4 poles.
● The maximum short-circuit current at the connection point determines the breaking
capacity.
● The type of supply determines the circuit design.
Ampacity of current path
The rated current values are the same for both DC and AC applications.
Switching DC currents
In AC circuits, arc quenching is facilitated because the current flows through zero. These
preconditions do not apply for DC.
For this reason, a high arc voltage must be developed to interrupt the direct current.
Therefore, the breaking capacity depends on the arc quenching method and the line voltage.
Several switching contacts can be connected in series in order to achieve a higher arc
voltage.
Furthermore, the effects to be expected in the event of a ground fault or double ground fault
must also be considered.
Setting of the trip values
● Thermal overload release ("L" release):
Same settings as in 50 / 60 Hz systems.
● Instantaneous short-circuit release ("I" release):
The threshold values of the instantaneous short-circuit release ("I" release) increase by
30 to 40%. See also Chap. 9
Application planning
5.4 Use in DC systems
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 61
Example:
4000 A + 30% = 5200 A
There is also a tolerance of ± 20%
At the Ii = 4000 A setting, the instantaneous short-circuit release responds at
approx. 5200 A ± 20%.
As the current has to flow through all of the conducting paths, the following connections are
recommended in order to satisfy the thermal tripping characteristics.
Recommended connections for DC systems
Table 5- 1 Recommended connections / maximum permitted DC voltage Ue
Circuit with 3-pole molded
case circuit breakers
Circuit with 4-pole molded case
circuit breakers 1)
≤ 250 V DC
Switching capacity N
≤ 500 V DC
Switching capacity H
2-pole switching (ungrounded system)
If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every
ground fault is rectified immediately (ground-fault
monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage is
600 V for both circuits.
On an ungrounded system, all poles must be switched
off.
≤ 500 V DC
Switching capacity H
≤ 600 V DC
Switching capacity L
2-pole switching (grounded system
)
The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual
conducting path, so that there are always 2 conducting
paths in series in a circuit with 3-
pole circuit breakers in
the event of a ground fault and 3 conducting paths in
series in a circuit with 4-pole circuit breakers in the
event of a ground fault.
≤ 600 V DC
Switching capacity L
≤ 600 V DC
Switching capacity L
1-pole switching (grounded system)
1) With 4
conducting paths in series, either the 4th pole must be equipped with a 100% release, or the 4th pole (N) must be
equipped with neither an overload release nor a short-circuit release.
Recommended connections for DC systems with voltages of more than 600 V DC (e.g. photovoltaic
plants)
Detailed information on request.
Technical Support: http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
(http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support)
Application planning
5.5 Use in IT systems
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
62 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
5.5
Use in IT systems
Use of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers in IT systems
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers up to size VL1250 have been tested in accordance
with IEC / EN 60947-2, Annex H (testing sequence for molded case circuit breakers for IT
systems) up to a maximum voltage (Ui max.) of 690 V AC. The 3VL8 and 3VL7 (1250 A)
cannot be used in an IT system.
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers for system protection from SIEMENS, optionally
available with thermal overload and electromagnetic short-circuit releases, or electronic trip
units, are suitable for use in IT systems. The molded case circuit breakers also meet the
requirements of IEC 60947-2 Annex H (EN 60947-2, Annex H). The respective options are
required here, and the necessary safety clearances (ventilation clearances) must be
observed.
Selection criteria for molded case circuit breakers
The devices are always dimensioned and selected independently of the relevant system
type. The circuit breaker is always selected in accordance with the maximum short-circuit
current in the IT system. The device is selected in accordance with the relevant Icu values of
the 3VL molded case circuit breaker. The neutral conductor is not grounded by definition in
the IT system.
The system operator ensures that no double ground fault can occur on the input or output
side of the molded case circuit breaker. In this case, the switching capacity of the IT systems
remains unchanged.
If this is not guaranteed, the values in accordance with the standard IEC 60947-2 Annex H
apply for single-pole short-circuits.
Application planning
5.5 Use in IT systems
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 63
Fault situation
The most critical fault for molded case circuit breakers in ungrounded IT systems is a double
ground fault on the infeed and load side of the molded case circuit breaker. If this fault
occurs, the entire phase-to-phase voltage is applied via one pole of the molded case circuit
breaker.
Figure 5-2 Double ground fault (ground fault and short-circuit to frame)
Explanation of the illustration
● Faults ① and ② simultaneously:
– Double ground fault on the load and infeed side
– Single-pole short-circuit, the full phase-to-phase voltage of 690 V is applied to main
contact L1
– Selection of the molded case circuit breaker according to their suitability as defined in
IEC 60947-2, Annex H
● Fault ③
– 2 or 3-pole short-circuit
– Multi-pole short-circuit, a voltage of 690 V /V 1.73 = 400 V is applied at the main
contacts
– The design of the molded case circuit breaker is in accordance with Icu/Ics
See also
Standards and specifications (Page 308)
Application planning
5.6 Use in motor protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
64 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
5.6
Use in motor protection
The overload and short-circuit releases are designed for optimal protection and direct
starting of three-phase AC squirrel-cage motors. The molded case circuit breakers for motor
protection are sensitive for phase failures and have an adjustable trip class.
The ETUs operate with a microprocessor.
Note
The 3VL circuit b
reakers with motor protection function are suitable for use in IE2 motors.
You can obtain detailed information for the use of the 3VL molded case circuit breaker with
IE3 motors on request.
Operating principle of the overcurrent releases
The tripping characteristic curves of the inverse-time delayed overload releases are specially
designed for overload protection of 3-phase AC motors.
With the inverse-time delayed overload release "L", the value IR can be set to be 0.4 to 1.0
times the rated current In of the molded case circuit breaker. This occurs in 0.01 increments
(e.g. 0.40 / 0.41 / 0.42 ... 0.99 / 1.0 x In), so that the molded case circuit breaker exactly
matches the rated current of the motor to provide optimal protection.
The current transformers in the 3VL molded case circuit breaker not only measure the load
current, they also supply power to the electronic trip unit. No external auxiliary power supply
is required.
This independence from an external energy supply guarantees a high standard of safety.
Area of application
Machine tools, manufacturing systems, presses, fans, air-conditioning units and packaging
machines all require motors that must be protected. This is the main area of application of
the 3VL molded case circuit breakers for motor protection.
Trip class
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers offer the option of selecting from various trip units with
fixed or adjustable trip classes that are suitable for differing motor applications.
ETU 10 M
This version is equipped with a thermal image, phase failure sensitivity and the fixed trip
class 10.
ETU 30 M
This version is equipped with an adjustable trip class 10 to class 30 in addition to the thermal
image and phase failure sensitivity.
Application planning
5.6 Use in motor protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 65
ETU 40 M
This version enables the parameters and the trip class 5 to class 30 to be configured step by
step using a menu on the LCD display that is built into the trip unit.
Trip classes
Trip class 5 is used for motors that have very simple start-up characteristics (those with a
short start-up time and a small mass moment of inertia). The class 30 releases are used to
protect motors that have to withstand difficult start-up characteristics (long start-up time and
large mass moment of inertia). The motor must be suitable for heavy-duty starting.
The trip class must be selected so that it corresponds to the overload factor of the motor
under operating conditions. You can find further information at the end of this chapter in the
figure "Current-time curve before and after overload, with thermal image".
Definition of the trip class
The trip class specifies the release time for balanced 3-pole loads, starting from the cold
state, with 7.2 times the set current Ir according to IEC 60947-4-1. Combinations with class
10 are normally used.
Applications that require a longer start-up time, such as fans with large blade diameters,
require a higher trip class.
Figure 5-3 ETU with trip classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
Tripping characteristic curve for molded case circuit breakers with electronic trip unit.
Application planning
5.6 Use in motor protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
66 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Thermal image
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers with electronic trip unit have a "thermal image" which
takes the pre-loading of the AC motor into consideration. The tripping times of the current-
dependent delayed overload releases are only valid for the unloaded (cold) state.
The pre-loading of the 3-phase AC motor must be taken into consideration in order to
prevent damage to the motor, e.g. after being frequently switched on without sufficient
cooling time.
Siemens offers the 3VL molded case circuit breakers with fixed thermal image to provide
maximum protection for the motor.
Functional principle of the thermal image
During operation, a thermal model of the motor is simulated in the ETU. This reduces the
response time of the molded case circuit breaker with thermal image such that further
overloads cannot damage the motor windings. The motor is switched off within a time limit
that is specified by the pre-loading.
An overload may also be the switch-on current of the motor.
After an overcurrent tripping, the tripping times are reduced in accordance with the tripping
characteristic curves.
A cooling time defined by the size of the motor is required before the motor can be switched
on again. This prevents the motor from being excessively thermally loaded by a current
immediately after an overload release occurs.
①
Without "thermal image"
②
With "thermal image"
Figure 5-4 Response time of the trip unit after overload release
Phase failure sensitivity
The "phase failure sensitivity" function is also integrated into the 3VL molded case circuit
breaker for motor protection. This ensures that the motor is reliably protected against
overheating if a phase interruption or a large fluctuation occurs.
The specified operational current IR is automatically reduced to 80% of the set value if the
RMS values of the operational currents in the three phases differ by 5 to 50% (depending on
release type).
Deviations of more than 50% mean the value of the current in the least loaded phase drops
to a level below 50% of the maximum loaded phase.
Application planning
5.7 Use in unusual environments:
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 67
5.7
Use in unusual environments:
If the 3VL molded case circuit breakers are to be used outside closed control cabinets or in
difficult operating conditions, the following information must be taken into account at the
planning stage:
Reduction factors under unusual operating conditions
● Altitude in excess of 2000 meters
● Temperature above 50 °C
● Frequencies outside the 50 / 60 Hz range
● Humidity
● etc.
You can find further details in DIN ISO 2533 "Standard Atmosphere".
Use at altitudes above 2,000 meters
The lower air density at altitudes above 2,000 meters affects the key electrical data of
molded case circuit breakers. The table in the Technical data (Page 142) shows the derating
factors that have to be taken into account when using the molded case circuit breakers at
altitudes above 2,000 m.
Use at different ambient temperatures
A reduction (derating) of the rated operational current of the 3VL molded case circuit
breakers is necessary if the ambient temperature around the molded case circuit breaker
exceeds 50 °C. The reference temperature is 40 °C for molded case circuit breakers with
RCD modules or for plug-in / withdrawable versions.
The permissible load for various ambient temperatures with reference to the rated
operational current of the molded case circuit breaker are shown in the technical data.
Furthermore, the following points must be taken into consideration, because each one of
these factors can influence the rated operational current and permissible load.
● Type of molded case circuit breaker (fixed-mounted, plug-in or withdrawable version)
● Type of main connection (vertical/horizontal busbar, cable)
● Ambient temperature around the molded case circuit breaker
● Altitude derating factors
● Temperature derating factors based on different trip units and connections
● Increased degree of protection
Application planning
5.7 Use in unusual environments:
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
68 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases are calibrated to 50 °C. As a result, the tripping
times of the thermal overcurrent releases increase for a constant current at low
temperatures.
To correct the tripping times, the thermal overcurrent release settings must be changed by
the factor from the table "Derating factors for thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases" in the
technical data (lower settings).
Use in systems with other frequencies
If low-voltage switching devices designed for 50 / 60 Hz are to be used at other line
frequencies, the following points must be taken into consideration:
● Thermal effects on the system components
● Switching capacity
● Service life of the contact system
● Tripping characteristics of the overcurrent releases
● Behavior of the accessories
Thermal rating of the system components and conductors depending on the line frequency
Molded case circuit breakers designed for alternating current of 50 / 60 Hz can be used at
lower frequencies for at least the same rated currents. However,the permissible operating
current must be reduced at frequencies higher than 100 Hz to ensure the specified
temperature rise limits are not exceeded.
Influence of temperature and humidity on overcurrent releases
The relevant reduction in the rated operating current (derating) of the 3VL molded case
circuit breakers is also necessary if the operating temperature of 50 °C or 70 °C is exceeded
at a relative humidity level (non-condensing) of 95%.
Thermal-magnetic TM releases
Figure 5-5 Thermal-magnetic TM
0 °C to +70 °C, ☂ 95%
The SENTRON VL thermal-magnetic releases are designed for use in ambient temperatures
up to 70 °C and a relative humidity level (non-condensing) up to 95%. The appropriate
correction factors must be applied for ambient temperatures above 50 °C. You can find more
information in Chapter 11.4 "Reduction factors"
Application planning
5.8 Use in series connection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 69
Electronic trip unit ETU
Figure 5-6 Standard ETU
-25 °C to +70 °C, ☂ 95%
The 3VL electronic trip units are designed for use in ambient temperatures up to 70 °C and a
relative humidity (non-condensing) up to 95%.
Electronic trip unit LCD ETU
Figure 5-7 LCD-ETU
-25 °C to +70 °C, ☂ 95%
The high-quality electronic trip units LCD ETUs are designed for use in ambient
temperatures up to 70 °C and a relative humidity (non-condensing) up to 95%. The
appropriate correction factors must be applied for ambient temperatures above 50 °C.
5.8
Use in series connection
In the case of molded case circuit breakers connected in series, the overload and short-
circuit protection is described as "selective" when, from the point of view of the direction of
energy flow, only the circuit breaker immediately upstream of the fault trips.
Current selectivity
The selectivity can be calculated in the
overload range
by comparing the time/current
characteristics. In the short-circuit range, this comparison leads to values that are too low.
The reason for this is that the trip unit behaves differently in the case of short-circuit currents
compared to its long-term behavior, e.g. in the case of overloads.
If the
short-circuit currents differ sufficiently
at the installation points of two molded case
circuit breakers, the instantaneous short-circuit releases can normally be set such that if a
short-circuit occurs behind the downstream circuit breaker, only this downstream breaker
trips.
If the
short-circuit currents are approximately the same
at the installation points of the
breakers, the grading of the tripping currents of the short-circuit releases only enables
selectivity up to a specific short-circuit current .
Application planning
5.8 Use in series connection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
70 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
This current is referred to as the selectivity limit.
If the values determined by the short-circuit current calculation (e.g. according to
IEC / EN 60909, DIN VDE 0102) at the installation point of the downstream circuit breaker
are below the selectivity limit listed in the respective table for the selected combination,
selectivity is guaranteed for all possible short-circuits at the installation point.
If the calculated short-circuit current at the mounting point is higher than the selectivity limit,
selective tripping by the downstream circuit breaker is only ensured up to the value listed in
the table. The engineer must judge whether the value can be considered to be sufficient
because the probability of, for example, the maximum short-circuit occurring is low.
Otherwise, a circuit breaker combination should be chosen whose selectivity limit lies above
the maximum short-circuit current.
Time selectivity
Selectivity can be achieved by time selectivity up to the threshold values of the
instantaneous short-circuit release. To achieve this, the upstream circuit breaker requires
delayed short-circuit releases, so that in the event of a fault, only the downstream circuit
breaker will disconnect the faulted system component from the supply.
Both the tripping delays and the tripping currents of the short-circuit releases are staggered.
Zone-selective interlocking - ZSI
Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) has been developed by SIEMENS for the 3VL molded case
circuit breakers to prevent long, undesired release times when several molded case circuit
breakers are connected in series.
ZSI enables the tripping delay to be reduced to 50 ms for the circuit breaker upstream from
the location of the short-circuit.
When selecting, ensure that the molded case circuit breaker can handle the initial balanced
short-circuit current IK at the installation point.
The following are required for the ZSI function:
● A COM20 or COM21 communication module
● A communication-capable ETU
You can find further details in the following manuals:
● "SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL circuit breakers with communication capability -
PROFIBUS" (Order No. A5E01051347)
● "SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL circuit breakers with communication capability -
Modbus" (Order No. A5E02126886)
Application planning
5.9 Use in transfer control system
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 71
5.9
Use in transfer control system
The 3KC ATC5300 transfer control device (automatic transfer control device) together with
two 3VL molded case circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism (MO), forms the
transfer control system that can be used to switch automatically or manually between two
low-voltage power distribution systems.
Overview of the 3KC ATC5300 transfer control device
The ATC5300 controls the transfer between two power supplies fully automatically, while
taking account of set limit values and delay times. It detects fluctuations occurring in the
main power supply quickly and switches to the standby power supply. The control device
only switches to the standby power supply after it has ensured that the standby supply is
providing the required quality. The devices switch back to the main power supply, taking into
consideration the set parameters, once the required quality has been restored. If the standby
power supply and/or the main power supply is fed by a generator, the control device also
offers a wide range of settings, such as a generator lead time, generator delay time, and
generator start test at specified times.
The ATC5300 can be used for the following applications:
● Supply of UPS (uninterruptible power supply) systems
● Emergency supply of public buildings, hotels and airports
● Supply of data centers and communication systems
● Supply of industrial processes requiring a high level of operational continuity.
Note
You can find more detailed information on the 3KC ATC5300 transfer control device in
the Industry Mall (www.siemens.com/industrymall).
Application planning
5.9 Use in transfer control system
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
72 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Structure of the transfer control system
● Infeeds line 1 (main system) and line 2 (standby system) are connected to the ATC5300.
● In case of system disturbances, the ATC5300 activates the 3VL molded case circuit
breakers Q1 and Q2 accordingly
● The 3VL molded case circuit breakers must be equipped with the following accessories:
– One motorized operating mechanism per molded case circuit breaker
– One alarm switch per molded case circuit breaker
– Two auxiliary switches 1NO/1NC per molded case circuit breaker
Application planning
5.9 Use in transfer control system
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 73
3KC ATC5300 transfer control device in a Modbus RTU network
The ATC5300 supports the Modbus communication protocol (RTU or ASCII) via the RS485
interface.
Easy system integration through integrated Modbus interface, for integrating into a power
management system, for example
Application planning
5.10 Use in communication environment
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
74 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
5.10
Use in communication environment
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers with communication-capable ETUs can be integrated
into PROFIBUS or MODBUS RTU networks via the COM20 / COM21 communication
modules.
Network topology
Network topology
Note
When using communication
-capable ETUs, the left-hand accessory compartment X2
contains an auxiliary switch and an alarm switch.
Application planning
5.10 Use in communication environment
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 75
More information
● System manual - SENTRON 3WL / 3VL circuit breakers with communication capability -
Modbus
● System manual - SENTRON 3WL / 3VL circuit breakers with communication capability -
PROFIBUS
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 77
Installing/mounting
6
6.1
Installation methods
Installation overview
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers are available in
fixed-mounted, plug-in
or
withdrawable
versions,
3-pole
or
4-pole
.
Table 6- 1 Overview of installation methods
Molded case circuit
breaker type
Fixed
Plug-in
Withdrawable part
VL160X
x
x
-
VL160
x
x
x
VL250
x
x
x
VL400
x
x
x
VL630
x
x
x
VL800
x
-
x
VL1250
x
-
x
VL1600
x
-
x
Fixed mounting
Mounting on mounting plate
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers can be mounted direct onto the mounting plate. If
busbars or terminals are used to connect the circuit breaker on the back of the mounting
plate, the appropriate safety clearances must be observed.
Technical overview (Page 132)
Mounting on 8US busbar adapter system
The 3VL to 630A molded case circuit breakers can be mounted on device adapters for
busbar systems.
You can find further information on this subject in the system manual for busbar systems.
Installing/mounting
6.1 Installation methods
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
78 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Busbar connections
Busbars or cables can be connected direct to the front of busbar extensions or to bolts for
connections on the back. If straight busbar extensions are used, terminal covers or phase
barriers are recommended.
Plug-in version
Mounting plate
Plug-in bases with flat terminals on the front or rear are available for direct connection of
cables or busbars. The plug-in base is attached direct to the mounting plate supplied by the
customer.
The appropriate safety clearances must be observed. Terminal covers or phase barriers are
available for the front connecting bars. Molded case circuit breakers cannot be removed from
the plug-in base in the "ON" position. The molded case circuit breaker will go to the "tripped"
position if attempts are made to remove it while in the "ON" position.
Installing/mounting
6.1 Installation methods
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 79
Withdrawable version
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers can be used as withdrawable devices. They can be
connected on either the front or the back. Terminal covers are provided and are required for
final installation.
In the connected position, the molded case circuit breaker is completely engaged, and all
contacts - supply, outgoing and auxiliary contacts - are connected to the guide frame. The
molded case circuit breaker is ready for operation.
Note
Safety interlock
A safety interlock prevents the mol
ded case circuit breaker from being removed when it is
switched on. The safety interlock causes the molded case circuit breaker to switch off so that
the arc which occurs inside the circuit breaker when current flows can be extinguished.
The molded case circuit breaker can be installed in and removed from the guide frame when
it is in the removable position.
Connected position
Disconnected position
Removable position
Installing/mounting
6.2 Mounting and safety clearances
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
80 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
6.2
Mounting and safety clearances
Permissible mounting positions
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers can be mounted in the positions shown:
Unlimited:
There is a separate mounting assembly for VL800 to VL1600 molded case
circuit breakers with guide frame in lateral installation position.
Limited:
•
Use of the internal accessories possible
•
Permissible current load factor 0.9
•
Not allowed: motorized operating mechanisms, rotary operating
mechanisms, plug-in assembly / withdrawable assembly
Safety clearances
During a short-circuit interruption, high temperatures, ionized gases and high pressures
occur in and above the arcing chambers of the molded case circuit breaker.
Safety clearances are required to:
● allow pressure distribution
● prevent fire or damage caused by any diffused ionized gases
● prevent a short circuit to grounded parts
● prevent arcing or short-circuit currents to live sections
Installing/mounting
6.2 Mounting and safety clearances
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 81
Table 6- 2 Permissible safety clearances in accordance with IEC 60947
Molded
case circuit
breaker
type
Switching
capacity
Minimum
footprint
m3
A ≤ 415 V
A > 415-690 V
B ≤ 690 V
C ≤ 690 V
D ≤ 690 V
With or
without
covers
Without
covers
With
covers
VL160X
N, H
0,011
35 mm
70 mm
35 mm
25 mm
25 mm
35 mm
VL160
N, H, L
0,011
50 mm
100 mm
50 mm
25 mm
25 mm
35 mm
VL250
N, H, L
0,015
50 mm
100 mm
50 mm
25 mm
25 mm
35 mm
VL400
N, H, L
0,036
50 mm
100 mm
50 mm
25 mm
25 mm
35 mm
VL630
N, H, L
0,18
50 mm
100 mm
50 mm
25 mm
25 mm
35 mm
VL800
N, H, L
0,22
50 mm
100 mm
50 mm
25 mm
25 mm
35 mm
VL1250
N, H, L
0,22
70 mm
100 mm
70 mm
30 mm
30 mm
50 mm
VL1600
N, H, L
0,264
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
30 mm
100 mm
N: Stan
dard
H: High
L: Very high
Figure 6-1 Safety clearances
Figure 6-2 No minimum clearance between two horizontally or vertically installed molded case
circuit breakers
Table 6- 3 Definition of the permissible safety clearances in [mm] between
A: Molded case circuit breakers and busbars (uninsulated and grounded metal); terminal cover
required above 600 V AC, 500 V DC
B:
Molded case circuit breaker terminal and lower panel
C: Sides of the molded case circuit breaker and side panels left / right (uninsulated and grounded
metal)
D: Molded case circuit breaker and non-conductive parts with at least 3 mm thick insulation
(insulator, insulated bar, painted plate)
Installing/mounting
6.2 Mounting and safety clearances
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
82 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
If uninsulated conductors are connected to terminals 1, 3, 5, they must be insulated from
each other independently of the direction of the mains supply. This can be achieved using
phase barriers or terminal covers.
Terminal covers must be used for the main terminals at voltages of > 600 V AC
or > 500 V DC.
Note
We recommend you also insulate connections 2, 4 and 6 from
each other for additional
safety.
Minimum clearance between two horizontally or vertically installed molded case circuit breakers
Ensure the busbar or cable connection does not reduce the air insulation clearance. The
permissible clearance between two molded case circuit breakers applies for both fixed-
mounted and plug-in versions. Some accessories may increase the width of the circuit
breaker.
F No minimum clearance is required between the molded case circuit breaker and the control
cabinet door
Figure 6-3 Minimum clearance between the molded case circuit breaker and metal
The clearance between the terminal and the grounded metal must be G ≥ 12 mm.
If the clearance to ground G is < 12 mm, live parts must be insulated or a suitable barrier
must be installed.
NOTICE
Depending on the application, appropriate air and creepage distances must be observed
that are described in standards IEC 61439-1 and 61439-2.
Installing/mounting
6.2 Mounting and safety clearances
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 83
Safety clearances between molded case circuit breakers
Minimum clearance to be maintained between two molded case circuit breakers installed
immediately above one another with different connection methods.
A
Font connection with cable, direct
B
Front connection with cable lug
C
Front connection with flat connecting bar
D
Rear connection with plug-in base or busbar terminals
①
Insulation
②
Insulation of busbar
Figure 6-4 Table of different connection types
Table 6- 4 Safety clearances to be maintained between molded case circuit breakers
Molded case circuit
breaker type
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Switching capacity
N, H
N, H, L
N, H, L
x ≤ 690 V
160 mm
200 mm
Installing/mounting
6.3 Locking devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
84 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
6.3
Locking devices
6.3.1
Locking devices for a padlock
Locking device for the toggle lever
Figure 6-5 Locking device for the toggle lever
The locking device for the toggle lever is designed to be easily attached to the molded case
circuit breaker escutcheon. This device allows the lever to be locked in the "OFF" position.
The locking device for the toggle lever can be installed in 3-pole and 4-pole molded case
circuit breakers. Up to 3 padlocks with diameters from 5 to 8 mm may be used. (Not for the
VL160X with RCD module)
Locking device for front-operated rotary operating mechanism
Figure 6-6 Locking device for front-operated rotary operating mechanism
Installing/mounting
6.3 Locking devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 85
Locking device for motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Figure 6-7 Locking motorized operating mechanism
Locking mechanism for motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
Figure 6-8 Locking device for motorized operating mechanisms with stored energy mechanism
Installing/mounting
6.3 Locking devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
86 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
6.3.2
Locking device with a safety lock
Safety lock for the rotary operating mechanism and the motorized operating mechanism
A safety lock can be used for both rotary operating mechanisms and motorized operating
mechanisms with stored energy mechanism (SEO).
The safety lock is used to lock the molded case circuit breaker in the "OFF" position. The key
can only be removed when the molded case circuit breaker is in the "OFF" position. The key
cannot be removed when the rotary operating mechanism or the motorized operating
mechanism is in the "ON" position.
Front
-operated rotary operating mechanism
with optional locking device
Motorized operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism (SEO) for
VL160X to VL800 with optional
locking device
6.3.3
Mutual interlocking of two molded case circuit breakers
Mutual interlocking of two molded case circuit breakers (Bowden wire) in the fixed-mounted, plug-in
and withdrawable versions
Possible interlocking
With toggle lever
With rotary operating mechanism / door
coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Two 3VL molded case circuit breakers can be mutually mechanically interlocked using a
Bowden wire and the locking modules.
Installing/mounting
6.3 Locking devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 87
Use of this accessory kit means only one of the molded case circuit breakers is in the "ON"
position at any time.
Fixed-mounted and plug-in molded case circuit breakers use different interlocking modules.
However, these are compatible with each other. This enables both to be used in interlock
circuits.
Two molded case circuit breakers can be mounted side by side or one above the other. The
distance between the two molded case circuit breakers depends on the length of the
Bowden wire and its minimum bending radius. The cable comes in lengths of 0.5, 1.0 and
1.5 m. The minimum bending radius for each cable is 60 mm. The length of the Bowden wire
must not be altered by the customer. The Bowden wire has a mechanical endurance of
10,000 operations. Each Bowden wire must be ordered separately.
The combination options of the molded case circuit breakers with Bowden wire interlocking is
described in Table 12-1 of Chapter 12.6.
Note
Not possible in combination with the motorized operating mechanism.
Mutual interlocking (rear interlocking module) of two molded case circuit breakers in the fixed-
mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
Fixed
-mounted version
(lock at rear)
Plug
-in version
(lock at rear)
Fixed
-mounted version
(lock at front)
Plug
-in version
(lock at front)
The rear interlocking module enables mutual mechanical interlocking of two 3VL molded
case circuit breakers of the same size. The rear interlocking module is attached behind the
molded case circuit breakers to the mounting plate supplied by the customer.
Installing/mounting
6.3 Locking devices
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
88 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
A tappet on each end of the rocker mechanically accesses each of the breakers through an
opening in the mounting plate and the base of the molded case circuit breakers. The rear
interlocking module prevents both molded case circuit breakers from being in the "ON"
position at the same time.
The rear interlocking module can be used with fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable
molded case circuit breakers.
Cross wiring of internal accessories via the rear of the molded case circuit breakers is not
prevented.
This locking version is possible with all operating mechanism types (toggle lever, rotary
operating mechanism, and motorized operating mechanism).
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 89
Connecting
7
7.1
Cables and busbars
The 3VL molded case circuit breaker can be connected using cables, flexible copper bars or
busbars.
Thermal and electrodynamic stresses affect these conductors in the event of a short-circuit.
To avoid dangerous effects, it is necessary to asses them correctly and to take appropriate
measures to suppress them.
The diagrams and tables below show the recommended maximum clearance between the
molded case circuit breaker and the first point.
Overview of cable and busbar mounting methods
Cable mounting
Busbar mounting
Table 7- 1 Recommended cable mounting clearances
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
A cable mm
100
100
130
150
300
B cable mm
400
400
400
400
600
C bar mm
250
This table applies for all switching capacities.
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
90 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Rated operating voltage: Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
Table 7- 2 Connection methods (Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC)
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
• Cable installed directly, e.g. via
box terminal or multiple feed-in
terminal
• Insulated up to the circuit
breaker
•
Accessories:
– None
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
Not
appli-
cable
• Cable with cable lug
• Clearance between non-
insulated conductor and the end
of the phase barrier at least
8 mm
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Cable lug
– Terminals with screw
connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N Not
appli-
cable
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 91
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
• Cable with cable lug
• Front connecting bars, standard
• Insulation 8 mm above phase
barrier
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars,
standard
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N Not
appli-
cable
• Cable with cable lug
• Front connecting bars, for
increased pole spacing
• Insulation 8 mm above phase
barrier
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars for
increased pole spacing
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N N
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
92 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• Without insulation
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
N N N N N N N N
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• With extended terminal cover
• Without insulation
•
Accessories:
– Extended terminal cover
– Terminals with screw
connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 93
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
REVERSE FEED
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• Incoming supply from
overcurrent release side
(REVERSE FEED)
• Without insulation
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• Insulation 250 mm from the
circuit breaker
•
Accessories:
– Terminals with screw
connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N N
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
94 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• Insulation 8 mm above phase
barrier and 250 mm from circuit
breaker
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N N
• Connecting bar
• Front connecting bars, standard
• Insulation 8 mm above phase
barrier and 250 mm from circuit
breaker
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars,
standard
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N N
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 95
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
• Connecting bar
• Front connecting bars,
• for increased pole spacing
• Insulation 8 mm above phase
barrier and 250 mm from circuit
breaker
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars for
increased pole spacing
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N N N N
• Connecting bar
• Front connecting bars, standard
• Insulation 250 mm from the
circuit breaker
•
Accessories:
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars,
standard
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
96 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 600 V AC / 500 V DC
• Connecting bar
• Front connecting bars, standard
• With extended connection cover
• Without insulation
•
Accessories:
– Extended terminal cover
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars,
standard
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N: Low
H: High
L: Very high
Rated operating voltage: Ue ≤ 690 V AC / 600 V DC
Table 7- 3 Connection methods (Ue ≤ 690 V AC / 600 V DC)
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 690 V AC / 600 V DC
• Cable installed directly, e.g. via
box terminal or multiple feed-in
terminal
• Insulated up to the circuit
breaker
•
Accessories:
– Standard terminal cover
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
Not
appli-
cable
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 97
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 690 V AC / 600 V DC
• Cable with cable lug
• Front connecting bars, standard
• Insulated up to the circuit
breaker
•
Accessories:
– Standard terminal cover
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars,
standard
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
Not
appli-
cable
• Cable with cable lug
• With extended connection cover
•
Accessories:
– Extended terminal cover
– Terminals with screw
connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• Insulation 250 mm from the
circuit breaker
•
Accessories:
• Standard terminal cover
• Terminals with screw connection
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
Connecting
7.1 Cables and busbars
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
98 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Circuit breaker dimensions
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Permissible switching capacity class for Ue ≤ 690 V AC / 600 V DC
• Connecting bar
• Front connecting bars, standard
• Insulation 250 mm from the
circuit breaker
•
Accessories:
– Standard terminal cover
– Terminals with screw
connection
– Front connecting bars,
standard
N
H
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
REVERSE FEED
• Connecting bar, directly installed
• Incoming supply from
overcurrent release side
(REVERSE FEED)
• Without insulation
•
Accessories:
– Phase barriers
– Terminals with screw
connection
N N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N
H
L
N: Low
H: High
L: Very high
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 99
7.2
Main connection types for fixed mounting
Main conductor connection for SENTRON 3VL fixed-mounted version
There are various methods of connecting the molded case circuit breaker main conductors
for fixed mounting.
Network connection
The 3VL molded case circuit breakers can be supplied with power from above and below.
Multiple feed-in terminal for circular conductors (copper/aluminum)
The multiple feed-in terminals for incoming supply and outgoing feeders consist of an
aluminum body with tin coating to prevent oxidation. Both aluminum and copper cables may
be used. Only one conductor is permitted per terminal. The multiple feed-in terminals are
available for the VL400 to VL1250 molded case circuit breakers.
Multiple feed
-in terminals
Use of multiple feed-in terminals
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
100 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Box terminals (copper cables or bars)
The VL160X to VL250 can be supplied optionally with box terminal or with screw-type
connection. The terminal is designed to connect either a conductor or a solid/flexible copper
bar.
Box terminals
Box terminals with solid/flexible copper bars
or cables
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Front connecting bars
Connecting bars are used to connect the circuit breakers to busbars or cables in electrical
systems. Front connecting bars are supplied with the SENTRON VL1600 as standard.
Phase barriers are also included. Extended terminal covers can be fitted if necessary.
Front connecting bar
Use of front connecting bars
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 101
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing are used to establish busbar connections
in switchboards or other electrical equipment. Normal use enables adjustment to the next
largest molded case circuit breaker. Phase barriers are also included.
Note
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing cannot be combined with extended
terminal covers!
Front connecting bars with increased pole
spacing
Use of front connecting bars with increased
pole spacing
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Rear terminals
Rear terminals are used to adapt the 3VL molded case circuit breakers to switchboards or
other applications that require rear connection. They are bolted direct to a standard
3VL molded case circuit breaker without requiring any modification. Molded case circuit
breakers mounted in switchboards or other electrical equipment may be removed from the
front by removing the fixing screw that connects the molded case circuit breaker to the
terminal.
Round terminals
Use of the terminals
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
102 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Rear flat busbar terminals
Rear flat busbar terminals are used to adapt VL630 to VL1600 molded case circuit breakers
to switchboards or other applications that require rear connection. The rear busbars are
bolted direct to a standard 3VL molded case circuit breaker without requiring any
modification. A vertical or horizontal connection is established, depending on the way the
busbar terminals are mounted to the rear of the circuit breaker. Molded case circuit breakers
mounted in switchboards or other electrical equipment with the help of rear flat busbar
terminals may be removed from the front by removing the fixing screw that connects the
molded case circuit breaker to the terminal.
Busbar
Busbar
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 103
Terminals with screw connection
The screw-type terminal with metric thread slides onto the incoming and outgoing terminal of
the 3VL molded case circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for connecting busbars
or cable lugs. The customer is responsible for providing screws and washers for the
terminals and busbars if the size specified below is exceeded. Screw-type terminals are
supplied for use with the SENTRON VL400 to VL1250 as standard.
Terminals with screw connection
Establishing terminals with screw connection
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Connection with cable lugs
Cable lug
Use of cable lug No. 1
Use of cable lug No.
2
Use of cable lug No.
3
Cable lugs (ring cable lugs) are used to connect the cables to the terminals of the molded
case circuit breaker.
Cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46220 with a narrow flange are recommended (VL1 to
VL4).
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
104 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Connection terminal for circular conductors (copper/aluminum)
Circular conductor terminals for the incoming supply and outgoing feeders consist of an
aluminum body with tin plating to prevent oxidation. Both aluminum and copper cables may
be used. Only one conductor is permitted per terminal.
The circular conductor terminals are available for the VL160X to VL400 molded case circuit
breakers.
For additional information, refer to the technical data in the chapter Configuration of main
connections (Page 136).
Auxiliary conductor terminal
The 3VL offers two versions of auxiliary conductors for voltage tap.
A) Connection with lug to circular conductor terminal (voltage tap)
The 3VL1-3VL7 circular conductor terminals are provided with an M3 hole. Using the screw
with contact washer provided, cable lugs up to 2.5 mm² can be connected.
The maximum load of the auxiliary conductor connection Imax = 500 mA must not be
exceeded.
Connecting
7.2 Main connection types for fixed mounting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 105
B) Connection with auxiliary conductor terminal in box or circular conductor terminal
The auxiliary connection terminal is an additional component that is inserted into a circular
conductor terminal or steel box terminal additionally to the main conductor.
①
Main conductor
②
Auxiliary conductor terminal
③
Circular conductor terminal
The maximum load of the auxiliary conductor connection Imax = 6 A must not be exceeded.
Connecting
7.3 Main connection methods for plug-in and withdrawable version
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
106 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Several auxiliary conductors can be connected to the auxiliary connection terminal:
● 1 x stranded with core end sleeve max. 4 mm² + 1 x stranded with AMP connector 6.3
● 1 x stranded with core end sleeve max. 4 mm² + 1 x stranded with core end sleeve max.
2.5 mm²
7.3
Main connection methods for plug-in and withdrawable version
Main conductor connection for plug-in and withdrawable version
There are different methods of connecting the molded case circuit breaker main conductors
for the plug-in and withdrawable version.
Connecting
7.3 Main connection methods for plug-in and withdrawable version
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 107
Plug-in base: Connection on the front with busbar connection pieces
Plug-in bases simplify installation and removal of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers. The
molded case circuit breaker has been developed together with the plug-in base in such a
way as to prevent disconnection in the "ON" position. Busbars or cables can be connected
on the front. A connection cover is supplied and is to be used both for the incoming and the
outgoing side. An additional phase barrier for insulation between the connections is possible
(see Connection covers/barriers and phase barriers). If the molded case circuit breaker is in
the connected position, the primary voltage is supplied via multiple terminal contacts in the
guide frame.
Plug
-in base (front)
Plug
-in base with busbar connection (busbar
covers are not shown)
Plug-in base: Connection on the back with flat busbar terminals
Busbars and cables can be connected on the back. Vertical and horizontal connections are
possible depending on the configuration of the connecting bars.
Plug-in base (rear)
Plug-in base with rear flat busbar terminals
Connecting
7.3 Main connection methods for plug-in and withdrawable version
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
108 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Withdrawable version: Connection on the front with busbar connection pieces
The withdrawable version enables the insertion and removal of the 3VL molded case circuit
breaker without requiring the disconnection of incoming or outgoing cables or busbars. A
special operating mechanism, attached to the stationary assembly, is used to insert or
remove the molded case circuit breaker. A mechanical interlock prevents the circuit breaker
from being moved from the connected position to the disconnected position when it is
switched on. The molded case circuit breaker will trip before the multiple clamping contacts
between the molded case circuit breaker and the guide frame open. A locking device with
padlock is provided on the stationary arm of the withdrawable unit. The customer can lock
the circuit breaker in either the disconnected or connected position.
Withdrawable version with front busbar
connections and terminal covers
Withdrawable version with front busbar
connections
Withdrawable version: Connection on the back with flat busbar terminals
It is possible to configure the busbars for horizontal connection when the withdrawable
assembly with rear flat busbar terminals is used. A separate kit is available for vertical
connection of molded case circuit breakers up to and including VL250.
Withdrawable version with rear flat busbar
connections (rear)
Withdrawable version with front flat busbar
connections (front)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 109
Displays and operator controls
8
8.1
Overcurrent trip unit without LCD display
The different setting options of the individual overcurrent releases without LCD display are
explained using the examples listed:
Magnetic overcurrent releases M VL160-VL630
Characteristic
curve
Application
View
Starter protection M, I function
Short-circuit protection, adjustable Ii = 7 to
15 x In,
for VL160 to VL630 (size dependent)
"DK" version
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases TM VL160X
Characteristic
curve
Application
View
System protection TM, LI / LIN function
Overload protection fixed,
short-circuit protection fixed
"DA", "EH" and "EA/EL" versions
System protection TM, LI / LIN function
Overload protection adjustable IR = 0.8 to
1 x In
Short-circuit protection fixed
"DD" version
Displays and operator controls
8.1 Overcurrent trip unit without LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
110 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases TM VL160-VL630
Characteristic
curve
Application
View
System protection TM, LI / LIN function
Overload protection adjustable IR = 0.8 to 1 x
In
Short-circuit protection adjustable Ii = 5 to
10 x In for VL160 to VL630
"DC", "EJ", "EM" and "EC" versions
Electronic trip units ETU VL160-VL1600
The electronic trip units include the following operating features:
● No auxiliary voltage is necessary for the tripping system. The tripping system draws its
supply from the main connecting cables. Reliable tripping is thus ensured.
● All ETUs have a thermal image
● A flashing green LED indicates correct operation of the microprocessor
● Overload status (I > 1.05 x IR) is indicated by a permanent yellow LED (alarm)
● Integrated self-test function
● Plug-in socket for tester
● Communication connection to PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RTU for ETUs with
communication preparation
Note
Signal output to the COM20 / COM21
Communication preparation (1 auxiliary switch and 1 alarm switch) is already integrated into
the left accessory compartment for all ETUs with communication preparation and wi
red to
the ETU. The cable to the COM20 / COM21 is included in the scope of supply.
Displays and operator controls
8.1 Overcurrent trip unit without LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 111
LED display
LED display of the ETU VL160 – VL1600 electronic trip units
● Active LED
The protective function of the molded case circuit breaker is always guaranteed regardless
of the current status of the ETU.
Color
LED OFF
LED flashes
LED ON (continuous light)
Green ETU not activated Normal status, the flashing
green LED signals that the
microprocessor is functioning
properly.
The LED is in continuous
light mode when the current
flow of the processor is
below the activation limit, in
other words, when the load
current flow is too low.
● Alarm LED
Color
LED OFF
LED flashes
LED ON (continuous light)
Yellow/orange No overload -- Signals overload,
I > 1.05 x I
R
Displays and operator controls
8.1 Overcurrent trip unit without LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
112 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Characteristic
curve
Application
View
ETU10 for system protection, LI/LIN function
Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to
0.95; 1 x In, time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 x In (size dependent)
"SB", "MB", "LB", "TB" and "NB" versions
Neutral conductor protection
In = 50% / 100% x IR, "TA", "LA" and "NA"
versions
ETU20 for system and generator protection,
LSI / LSIN function
Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to
0.95; 1 x In
Short-circuit protection (short-time delay)
Isd = 1.5 to 10 x IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s
I2t selectable on / off
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 11 x In (fixed setting, size dependent)
"SE", "ME", "LE", "TE" and "NE" versions
Neutral conductor protection
In = 50% / 100% x IR, "TF", "LF" and "NF"
versions
ETU12 for system protection,
LIG / LING function
Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to
0.95; 1 x In
time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 x In (size dependent)
On 4-pole molded case circuit breakers:
neutral conductor
protection 50% / 100% × IR
"TN"and "NN" versions
Ground-fault protection:
Ig = 0.6 / 1.0 In, tg = 0.1 / 0.3 s
measuring method No. 1: (GR) vectorial
summation current formation in the three
phases and neutral conductor (4-conductor
systems); IΔn = In, versions "SL", "SF", "ML",
"MF", "TN", and "NN"
Displays and operator controls
8.1 Overcurrent trip unit without LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 113
Characteristic
curve
Application
View
ETU22 for system and generator protection,
LSIG / LSING function
Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to
0.95; 1 x In,
Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed)
Isd = 1.5 to 10 x IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s
I2t selectable on / off
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 11 x In (fixed setting, size dependent)
On 4-pole molded case circuit breakers:
neutral conductor
protection 50% / 100% × IR
"TH" and "NH" versions
Ground-fault protection:
Ig = 0.6 / 1.0 In, tg = 0.1 / 0.3 s
Measuring method No. 1: (GR) vectorial
summation current formation in the three
phases and neutral conductor (4-wire
systems);
IΔn = In, versions "SG", "MG", "SH", "MH",
"TH", "NH"
ETU10M for motor and generator protection,
LI function
Finely adjustable overload protection
IR = 0.41; 0.42 to 0.98; 0.99; 1 x In,
Trip class tC = 10 (fixed setting)
Thermal image
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 x In (size dependent) with
phase failure sensitivity (40% IR fixed
setting)
"SP" and "MP" versions
ETU30M for motor and generator protection,
LI function
Finely adjustable overload protection
IR = 0.41; 0.42 to 0.98; 0.99; 1 x In,
Trip class tC = 10, 20, 30
Thermal image
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 6 to 11 x In with phase failure sensitivity
(40% IR fixed setting)
"SS", "MS" and "LS" versions
Displays and operator controls
8.2 Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
114 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
8.2
Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display
The electronic trip units with LCD display have the following operating features:
● No auxiliary voltage is necessary for the tripping system.
● Current display
● Correct microprocessor operation is displayed.
● Overload status (I > 1.05 x IR) is indicated by "overload" on the LCD display
● Direct, user-friendly, menu-driven setting of the absolute values of the protection
parameters in absolute ampere values via buttons
● Integrated self-test function
● Plug-in socket for tester
● Communication link to PROFIBUS DP and MODBUS RTU possible
Note
Signal output to the COM20 / COM21
Communication
preparation (1 auxiliary switch and 1 alarm switch) is already integrated
into the left accessory compartment for all LCD
-ETUs and wired to the LCD-ETU. The
COM20
/ COM21 cable is included in the scope of supply.
Displays and operator controls
8.2 Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 115
Electronic trip unit LCD ETU
Characteristic
curve
Application
View
ETU40 for system protection, LI / LSI / LSIN
function,
ETU40M motor / generator protection,
LI
function
Overload protection IR = 0.4 to 1 x In,
Trip class tC = 5 to 30 at ETU40M
Time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30 at ETU40
Thermal image selectable on / off,
with phase failure sensitivity with ETU40M
(5 ... 50% IR adjustable)
"UP" version
Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed) on
ETU40
Isd = 1.5 to 10 x IR, tsd1) = 0 to 0.5 s
I2t selectable on / off on ETU40
"UH" and "UJ" versions
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 x In (size dependent)
ETU42 for system protection,LSIG/LSING
function
Overload protection IR = 0.4 to 1 x In
Time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30
Thermal image selectable on/off
Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed)
Isd = 1.5 to 10 x IR, tsd1) = 0 to 0.5 s
I2t selectable on / off
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 x In (size dependent)
Ground-fault protection:
Measuring method No. 1: (GR) vectorial
summation current formation in the three
phases and neutral conductor (4-conductor
systems); IΔn = 0.4 to 1 x In, "UL", "UM" and "UN"
versions
Measuring method No. 2: (GGND) direct
measurement of the ground-fault current using a
current transformer, Ig = 0.4 to 1 x In, tg = 0.1 to
0.5 s; "UM" version
On 4-pole molded case circuit breakers:
neutral conductor protection N: 50 to 100% IR
selectable or adjustable.
1) For tsd = 0, the ST function must be set to the value "disabled".
Displays and operator controls
8.2 Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
116 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
MENU on the LCD display of the overcurrent release
The following languages are available:
● English (default)
● German, French, Italian, Spanish
Displays and operator controls
8.2 Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 117
Figure 8-1 MENU on the LCD display of the overcurrent release
Displays and operator controls
8.2 Overcurrent trip unit with LCD display
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
118 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Commissioning
The overcurrent release must be activated before it can be parameterized. A minimum load
current of approximately 20% of the relevant rated current In of the molded case circuit
breaker is required.
Note
The factory
-set "LCD-ETU" with the maximum settings for the overload release and the
s
hort-circuit release must be adapted during commissioning.
Changing the parameters for the overload and short
-circuit releases during operation to a
value below the current operating value causes instantaneous tripping.
If this minimum load current is not available, the required auxiliary power can be supplied
using the 3VL9000-8AP01 hand-held tester. In molded case circuit breakers with
communication capability, the trip unit is supplied with power by the COM20/21 Release 2.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 119
Parameter assignment / addressing
9
9.1
Setting the parameters
Settings on the ETU
Note
Adjusting settings
The overcurrent release is preset with the maximum settings for the overload release and
the short
-circuit release. You must adjust these settings to the requirements of the system
when installing the molded case circuit breakers.
Changing the setting values for the overload and short
-circuit releases during operation to a
value below the present operat
ing value causes instantaneous tripping.
The protection parameters to be set on the electronic trip unit of the molded case circuit
breaker depend on the technical environment (switchgear, cables), the network
configuration, and the type of equipment to be protected. There are no fixed protection
settings. The protection parameters can be determined by the relevant electrical planning
engineer.
The Siemens software tool SIMARIS Design offers a simple, quick and safe solution for
dimensioning switching and protective devices.
Internet link to SIMARIS (www.siemens.com/simaris)
Tripping characteristic curve and settings parameters
The time/current characteristic of a trip unit offers the best method for calculating the tripping
characteristics of a trip unit. The tripping characteristic reflects the response of the circuit
breaker in the event of a fault, e.g. overload or short-circuit. The time required to trip is
defined at a specific current. The tripping characteristic is split into different sections. Each
section reflects the tripping response of the circuit breaker at a specific current level
Depending on the type of tripping, the trip units can be supplied with or without the S, N, or G
functions (L, S, I, N, G designations in accordance with IEC 60947-2, Annex K).
● L long time delay = overload protection with current-dependent long time delay and
current-dependent tripping curve (I2t = constant)
● S short time delay (short-circuit protection with short-time delay) = short-circuit protection
with current-dependent or current-independent short time delay and current-dependent
tripping curve (I2tsd = constant)
● I Instantaneous = short-circuit protection with instantaneous adjustable tripping.
● N Neutral protection = protection of the neutral conductor with adjustable, current-
dependent tripping curve.
● G Ground fault = ground-fault protection with current-independent short-time delay
Parameter assignment / addressing
9.1 Setting the parameters
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
120 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Parameter
Setting buttons
Effect on
characteristic curve
Brief description
Cause
L
IR
Tripping current of the
overload protection IR =
0.4 to 1 x In
Setting to the operating current of
the circuit to be protected
tR
Delay (or time-lag
class) in the overload
range. The set time is
the tripping time at 6 x
IR. tR = 2.5 to 30 s
Improved selectivity in the
overload range in switchgear with
several grade levels when the
rated currents differ only slightly
S
Isd
Tripping current of the
short-time delayed
short-circuit protection
Isd = 1.5 to 10 x IR
Short-circuit release with time
delay. In this way, time selectivity
can be achieved with
downstream switching devices.
I2tsd
Change from a
constant time delay to a
I2t characteristic curve
in the short-circuit
range I2tsd = ON or OFF
Improved selectivity with
downstream switchgear, e.g.
LVHRC fuses
tsd
Delay time of the short-
circuit protection.
Please note: The
selection between tsd =
constant and I2t
characteristic tsd 1) = 0
to 0.5 s with the
position of the rotary
encoding switch
Improved selectivity of the short-
circuit protection in switchgear
with several grade levels
I
Ii
Tripping current of the
instantaneous short-
circuit release Ii = 1.25
to 11 x In
Instantaneous short-circuit
tripping for immediate shutdown
of the molded case circuit
breaker when the permissible
short-circuit current is exceeded
N
IN
Tripping current of the
neutral conductor
protection IN = 0.5 or 1
x IR
Overload protection of a neutral
conductor or protection of a
conductor with reduced cross-
section
Parameter assignment / addressing
9.1 Setting the parameters
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 121
Parameter
Setting buttons
Effect on
characteristic curve
Brief description
Cause
G
Ig/tg
Tripping current and
time delay of the
ground-fault protection
Ig = Off, 1 or 0.6 x In tg =
Off, 0.1 s or 0.3 s
Protection from short-circuit to
ground and thus prevention of
arcs. Ground-fault protection is
part of the fire protection.
1) For LCD ETUs, the ST function must be set to the value "disabled" for tsd = 0.
Setting of the protection parameter for line and generator protection
The settings are variable depending on the trip unit (ETU10, ETU12, ETU20, ETU22, LCD-
ETU40 and LCD-ETU42). The following parameters can be set depending on the version:
L overload release I
R
:
The overload release IR is set to the operating current IB of the circuit to be protected. This
takes place with the help of the left rotary encoding switch IR that is set to the factor IB/In
(example: IB = 250 A, In = 315 A => setting factor 250 / 315 = 0.79 corresponds to 0.8 on the
rotary encoding switch).
Delay time t
r
:
The delay time (or time-lag class) tr can be set using another rotary encoding switch. The set
time is the tripping time at 6 x Ir. In this way, selectivity to other molded case circuit breakers
can be achieved in the overload range, for example, when the rated current range does not
differ much.
S short-time delayed short-circuit protection I
sd
:
The short-time delay short-circuit protection can be set with regard to the tripping value of
the current Isd and the delay time tsd. Isd refers to the tripping value of the overload release IR
and can be set between 1.5 to 10 x IR (depending on the molded case circuit breaker).
Delay time t
sd
:
Depending on the requirements and on the trip unit, selectivity to the other molded case
circuit breakers can be achieved with appropriate selection of the delay time tsd. If the rotary
encoding switch is in the "ON" range, this means the delay time is current-dependent. The I2t
value is constant. For example, the higher the current, the faster the circuit breaker will trip
(equivalent to the overload release IR). In contrast, the delay time in the "OFF" position is
current-independent, that is, constant. If the current reaches the set value Isd, the circuit
breaker trips after the set time tsd. The degree to which the current exceeds the value Isd is
not important. The set time is the tripping time at 8 x Ir.
Parameter assignment / addressing
9.1 Setting the parameters
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
122 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
I
2
t waveform:
A I2t waveform of the characteristic curve can be switched in (depending on the ETU), the
delay time tsd is based on the reference point 8 x IR. Two different procedures are used to
form the characteristic curve. As well as a fixed time delay for all currents in the
characteristic curve section, the I2t characteristic can also be used. The tripping time falls
continuously as the current increases, and the product of squared current and time remains
constant.
Figure 9-1 I2t
I instantaneous short-circuit protection I
i
:
On some trip units, the instantaneous short-circuit release Ii can also be set. This refers to
the rated current In of the molded case circuit breaker. It must always be noted that either the
instantaneous short-circuit release (Ii) or the delayed short-circuit release (Isd) handles
personnel protection. The tripping current of the short-circuit release of the molded case
circuit breaker is set to a value that is at least 20% (tolerance of the trip unit) lower than the
lowest short-circuit current at the installation location and simultaneously higher than the
maximum operating current +20%. This guarantees that the circuit breaker will trip within the
required time even with the smallest short-circuit current, and that correct currents will not
result in unwanted trips.
G ground-fault protection I
g
:
The tripping value of the of the ground-fault release Ig is fixed to the rated breaker current on
the ETU12 and ETU22. The tripping current of the ground-fault release can be set to
between 0.6 and 1 x In, and the delay time tg can be set between 0.3 s and 0.6 s. The
measuring methods for the ground-fault protection are specified on the representation of the
trip unit. On the ETU42, the tripping current of the ground-fault release can be set to
between 0.4 and 1 x In, and the delay time can be set between 0.1 s and 0.5 s.
Note
Ground-fault protection
It must be noted that the ground
-fault protection is not a residual-current operated circuit
break
er (FI or RCD in the building installation). Fault currents to ground therefore cannot be
detected, only ground "short"
-circuits.
Parameter assignment / addressing
9.2 Setting the protection parameters for motor protection (ETU10M, ETU30M and LCD-ETU 40M)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 123
9.2
Setting the protection parameters for motor protection (ETU10M,
ETU30M and LCD-ETU 40M)
The selection of the molded case circuit breaker is oriented around the rated operating
current of the motor; the releases are specially designed for overload protection of 3-phase
motors.
Overload release IR:
The overload release IR is set to the rated current of the motor, in the same way as
protection parameters for line and generator protection. The overload protection is finely
adjustable with the left rotary encoding switch (first decimal place) and the center rotary
encoding switch (second decimal place) in the range between IR = 0.41; 0.42 to 0.98; 0.99;
1 x In (In = rated breaker current).
Example
Adjusting to the motor current 360 A is carried out for the rotary encoding switch left and
center (ETU10M and ETU30M) (rated breaker current In = 500 A) as follows:
Overload protection setting
Setting IR / rated breaker current In = 360 A / 500 A = 0.72
1. Setting the rotary encoding switch left factor 0.7
2. Setting the rotary encoding switch center factor 0.02
Short-circuit release Ii
Furthermore, instantaneous short-circuit release Ii can also be set depending on the trip unit.
This setting value refers to the rated current In of the molded case circuit breaker. As with
line and generator protection, the minimum short-circuit must be taken into account when
selecting the setting.
With the ETU30M version, you must note that the setting of the short-circuit release is
selected in combination with the time-lag class. The rotary encoding switch is divided into
three areas here, corresponding to the values 6, 8 or 11 x In. The desired time-lag class can
be selected within these ranges.
Parameter assignment / addressing
9.2 Setting the protection parameters for motor protection (ETU10M, ETU30M and LCD-ETU 40M)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
124 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Setting the time-lag class/trip class
The 3VL molded case circuit breaker offers the option of selecting from various time-lag
classes or trip classes for different motor applications.
One version (ETU10M) contains a thermal image and phase failure sensitivity based on a
fixed trip class 10.
With the ETU30M, both the time-lag class TC and the tripping current of the short-circuit
release are set in combination with the right rotary encoding switch.
The other version (ETU40M) with an LCD trip unit permits step by step setting from class 5
to 30. The setting in accordance with CLASS 5 is only used on motors with an extremely low
overload capacity. In CLASS 30, by contrast, the motor must be suitable for starting under a
heavy load. That is, the trip class must be adapted to the start-up time of the motor.
Definition of the trip class
The trip class specifies the start-up times during the motor start in accordance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The trip class is defined by the tripping time at 7.2-times the set current level
(in the cold state). Combinations with CLASS 10 are generally used.
The tripping times are as follows:
● CLASS 5 between 0.5 and 5 secs,
● CLASS 10 between 4 and 10 secs,
● CLASS 20 between 6 and 20 secs,
● CLASS 30 between 9 and 30 secs.
Applications such as fans, require longer start-up times.
Phase failure sensitivity
The "phase failure sensitivity" function is also integrated into the trip units for motor
protection ETU10M, ETU30M and ETU40M. This ensures that the motor is reliably protected
against overheating if a phase interruption or a large fluctuation occurs. The phase failure
sensitivity protects 3-phase AC motors against overheating while only 2 phases are active.
The specified operating current IR is automatically reduced to 80% of the set value if the
RMS values of the operating currents in the three phases in the case of the ETU10M and
ETU30M trip units differ by more than 40%. If an adjustable phase unbalance of 5 to 50% is
set on the ETU40M trip unit, the set operating current IR is automatically reduced to 87% of
the set value.
Thermal image
All releases with overload protection function have a "thermal image" which takes the pre-
loading of the AC motor into consideration. The function of the fixed thermal image cannot
be switched off (except on the ETU40M). Following an overload trip of the molded case
circuit breaker, the tripping time is reduced by the thermal pre-loading of the molded case
circuit breaker in such a way that further overloads cannot harm the motor windings.
After an overload trip, the tripping times are reduced in accordance with the tripping
characteristic curves so that the inrush current can already cause a trip. A cooling time
dependent on the size of the motor is required before the motor can be switched on again.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 125
Service and maintenance
10
10.1
Preventive measures
Maintenance
DANGER
Qualified personnel
Functionality tests and maintenance tasks must only be carried out by qualified personnel
due to the dangers associated with electrical equipment.
The following inspection intervals must be defined by the operator (qualified skilled
personnel) depending on the conditions of use of the relevant 3VL molded case circuit
breaker:
● At least 1 x per year
● After severe high-energy shutdowns
● After trips caused by the electronic overcurrent release
● After shutdowns caused by the thermal overcurrent release
● After shutdowns caused by the magnetic instantaneous overcurrent release
● Additional testing of downstream molded case circuit breakers.
Service and maintenance
10.1 Preventive measures
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
126 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Inspection
The following checks must be carried out within the scope of the inspection(s) and/or after
1,000 rated current shutdowns. Please proceed as follows:
● External circuit breaker housing
– Examine all visible surfaces for oxidation, residues or other adverse effects.
– Remove residues with a lint-free, dry and clean cloth. (Never use chemical cleaners or
water)
NOTICE
Damage to the molded case circuit breaker
Never carry out repairs to the plastic casing or the interior of the circuit breaker!
Molded case circuit breakers contain only maintenance-free components.
● Electrical and mechanical functions of the circuit breaker
– Test the operating lever to check the mechanical functioning of the molded case circuit
breaker contacts
● Function of the mechanical on and off switch
– Operate the trip button, if available. Return the molded case circuit breaker to the
starting position after each operation.
● Main circuits and control circuits, function.
● Check connections are tight
– Check the tightening torque of the connecting screws (80% of the tightening torque
recommended)
– Visual inspection of the incoming and outgoing cables
– Visual inspection of the connection accessories
– Replace damaged terminal accessories after cleaning the terminal area
● Check and, if necessary, correct the settings of the overcurrent release in accordance
with the system conditions
– Electronic molded case circuit breaker releases must only be tested with a device
especially supplied for this purpose (MLFB: 3VL9000-8AP01).
The operator (customer) must arrange for the disposal of the molded case circuit breaker or
the replaced parts at the end of their service life in accordance with the currently applicable
legal requirements and guidelines.
Service and maintenance
10.2 Troubleshooting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 127
10.2
Troubleshooting
Notes on troubleshooting
Table 10- 1 Troubleshooting
Circuit breaker status
Causes of faults
Corrective action
Overload causes
circuit breaker to trip:
Excessive current
The circuit breaker is functioning correctly and switches off an overload
that occurs. Check to see if the operating current has exceeded the
thermal tripping limit.
Connecting cable not
correctly connected to the
circuit breaker
Carry out a visual inspection of the terminals for discoloration. Cables
can become loose during service due to various reasons such as
vibration (machine tool applications) and cold flow (for aluminum
cables)
Ambient temperature too
high
This can be a problem on hot summer days or in areas subject to
extreme heat. Although all 3VL molded case circuit breakers are
calibrated for use at an ambient temperature of 50 °C, the
temperatures in the enclosures can exceed this level. It may be
necessary to consider derating the In or IR values. See the Chapters
Use in unusual environments, and Derating factors
Overcurrent release not
correctly connected to the
circuit breaker.
If none of the above suggestions apply, the overcurrent release must
be removed from the molded case circuit breaker and inspected for
discoloration. The tightening torque values are listed in the operating
manual supplied with every circuit breaker.
Short-circuit causes
circuit breaker to trip:
Excessive making
current, e.g. motor
Adjust the magnetic trip rating to the next highest setting or until the
circuit breaker does not trip when the motor is started.
High current peaks, e.g.
when changing from star
to delta in star-delta
starters.
A current peak of up to 20 times the rated current of the motor can
occur when changing from star to delta. In this case, the short-circuit
release "I" must be set to a higher value. However, this may result in
the loss of the desired higher motor protection function.
Service and maintenance
10.2 Troubleshooting
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
128 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Circuit breaker status
Causes of faults
Corrective action
Mechanical and
electrical functions:
High humidity The molded case circuit breakers must not be used in environments
with high humidity since this can cause dielectric and insulation
problems. In such environments, appropriate measures need to be
taken, such as placing the circuit breaker in an enclosure.
Corrosion The molded case circuit breakers are not designed to be used in
aggressive environments.
In such environments, the circuit breaker should be installed in a
housing.
Function of the internal
accessories
Determine what type of internal accessories are installed. Remove the
molded case circuit breaker cover and determine the type of
accessories using the circuit breaker order number. Then check for
correct functioning.
• Undervoltage release:
Ensure the correct voltage is connected to the undervoltage
release since otherwise, the circuit breaker cannot be tripped.
• Shunt release:
Ensure the voltage is not applied to the shunt release since this can
also prevent the circuit breaker from tripping.
• Auxiliary and alarm switches:
The auxiliary and alarm switches do not have any effect on the
protection function of the molded case circuit breaker.
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 129
Technical data
11
11.1
General data - 3VL molded case circuit breakers
Type
VL160X
3VL1
VL160
3VL2
VL250
3VL3
VL400
3VL4
VL630
3VL5
VL800
3VL6
VL1250
3VL7
VL1600
3VL8
Max. rated current In [A]
160
160
250
400
630
800
1250
1600
N pole [A]
160
160
250
400
630
800
1250
1600
Rated insulation voltage Ui in accordance with IEC 60947-2
Main current paths [V AC]
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
Auxiliary circuits [V AC]
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
Rated impulse withstand voltage U
imp
Main current paths [kV]
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Auxiliary circuits [kV]
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Rated operating voltage Ue
IEC 50 / 60 Hz [V AC]
690
4)
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
IEC DC
3)
500
600
600
600
600
-
1)
-
1)
-
1)
NEMA 60 Hz [V AC]
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
Utilization category
(IEC 60947-2)
A A A A A A A A
Permissible ambient temperature
Operation [°C] 2) 0 to
+70
-25 to
+70
-25 to
+70
-25 to
+70
-25 to
+70
-25 to
+70
-25 to
+70
-25 to
+70
Storage [°C] -40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
-40 to
+80
1) Breaker cannot be used for direct current.
2) Exception: 3VL molded case circuit breaker w
ith TMTU: 0 °C ... 70 °C
3) The values apply for at least 3 current paths in series and extremely high breaking capacity L. For switching direct
current, the maximum permissible direct voltage per current path must be observed.
4) VL160X in the 16 A and 20 A version cannot be used at 690 V.
Note
For more information, see the following chapter:
Use in DC systems
(Page 60) under "Suggested circuits for DC networks"
Technical data
11.1 General data - 3VL molded case circuit breakers
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
130 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Type
VL160X
3VL1
VL160
3VL2
VL250
3VL3
VL400
3VL4
VL630
3VL5
VL800
3VL6
VL1250
3VL7
VL1600
3VL8
Permissible load at different ambient temperatures
directly next to the molded case circuit breaker, related to the rated current of the molded case circuit breaker
• Molded case circuit breaker for system protection / generator protection
TM/ETU up to 50 °C [%]
100 /-
100 / 100
100 / 100
100 / 100
100 / 100
- / 100
- / 100
- / 100
TM/ETU up to 60 °C [%]
93 / -
93 / 95
93 / 95
93 / 95
93 / 95
- / 95
- / 95
- / 95
TM/ETU up to 70 °C [%]
86 / -
86 / 80
86 / 80
86 / 80
86 / 80
- / 80
- / 80
- / 80
• Molded case circuit breaker for motor protection
ETU to 50 °C [%]
-
100
100
100
100
-
-
-
ETU at 60 °C [%]
-
95
95
95
95
-
-
-
ETU at 70 °C [%]
-
80
80
80
80
-
-
-
• Molded case circuit breakers for starter combinations and non-automatic air circuit breakers
TM to 50 °C [%]
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
TM at 60 °C [%]
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
TM at 70 °C [%]
86
86
86
86
86
86
86
86
Type
VL160X
3VL1
VL160
3VL2
VL250
3VL3
VL400
3VL4
VL630
3VL5
VL800
3VL6
VL1250
3VL7
VL1600
3VL8
Weights of 3-pole molded case circuit breakers [kg]
• Basic breaker without
overcurrent release
- 1,5 1,6 4,2 7,8 14,2 21 27,3
• Thermal-magnetic
overcurrent release
- 0,7 0,7 1,5 1,2 - - -
• Electronic trip unit - 0,9 0,9 1,7 1,5 1,8 4,0 4,0
• Basic breaker with thermal-
magnetic overcurrent release
2,0 2,2 2,3 5,7 9,0 - - -
• Basic breaker with electronic
trip unit
- 2,4 2,5 5,9 9,3 16,0 25,0 31,3
Weights of 4-pole molded case circuit breakers [kg]
• Basic breaker without
overcurrent release
- 2,0 2,2 5,5 9,7 18,2 27,5 34,8
• Thermal-magnetic
overcurrent release
- 1,0 1,0 1,9 1,5 - - -
• Electronic trip unit - 1,1 1,1 2,1 2,0 2,3 6,0 6,0
• Basic breaker with thermal-
magnetic overcurrent release
2,5 3,0 3,2 7,4 11,2 - - -
• Basic breaker with electronic
trip unit
- 3,1 3,3 7,6 11,7 20,5 33,5
40,8
Technical data
11.1 General data - 3VL molded case circuit breakers
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 131
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity in accordance with IEC 60947-2
See the chapter Technical
overview (Page 132)
•
Service life make-break
operations
20000 20000 20000 20000 10000 10000 3000 3000
•
Service life electrical make-
break operations
10000 10000 10000 10000 5000 3000 1500 1500
•
Max. switching frequency
[1/h]
120 120 120 120 60 60 30 30
•
Connection types
See the chapter Connecting (Page 89)
Technical data
11.2 Technical overview
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
132 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.2
Technical overview
The technical overview lists all the operating data and dimensions as well as the possible
overcurrent tripping methods and the switching capacities of the 3VL molded case circuit
breakers. The RCD blocks overview contains the relevant operating data.
VL160X, VL160 to VL400
Table 11- 1 Technical overview VL160X, VL160 to VL400
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
Rated current In at 50 °C ambient
temperature
16 to 160 A 50 to 160 A 200 to 250 A 200 to 400 A
Number of poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
mm A
mm B
mm C
mm D
105
157
81
107
139
157
81
107
105
175
81
107
139
175
81
107
105
175
81
107
139
175
81
107
139
279
102
138
183
279
102
138
Overcurrent release
Thermal-magnetic TM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Electronic trip unit ETU
--
--
X
X
X
X
X
X
VL630 to VL1600
Table 11- 2 Technical overview VL630 to VL1600
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Rated current In at 50 °C ambient
temperature
315 to 630 A 800 A 1000 to 1250 A 1600 A
Number of poles
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
mm A
mm B
mm C
mm D
190
279
102
138
253
279
102
138
190
406
114
151
253
406
114
151
229
406
152
207
305
406
152
207
229
406
152
207
305
406
152
207
Overcurrent release
Thermal-magnetic TM
X
X
--
--
--
--
--
--
Electronic trip unit ETU
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Technical data
11.2 Technical overview
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 133
Standard breaking capacity VL160X, VL160 to VL400
Table 11- 3 SENTRON VL - N rated breaking current (kA) symmetrical (standard breaking capacity)
Type
SENTRON
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
IEC 60947-2 Up to 240 V AC
Up to 415 V AC
Up to 440 V AC
Up to 500/525 V AC
Up to 690 V AC
65/65
55/55
25/20
18/14
8/4
1)
65/65
55/55
25/20
25/20
12/6
65/65
55/55
25/20
25/20
12/6
65/65
55/55
35/26
25/20
15/8
Up to 250 V DC
Up to 500 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
30/30
--
--
32/32
--
--
32/32
--
--
32/32
--
--
1) For rated currents from 25 A. VL160X in the 16 A and 20 A version cannot be used at 690 V.
Standard breaking capacity VL630 to VL1600
Table 11- 4 SENTRON VL - N rated breaking current (kA) symmetrical (standard breaking capacity)
Type
SENTRON
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
IEC 60947-2 Up to 240 V AC
Up to 415 V AC
Up to 440 V AC
Up to 500/525 V AC
Up to 690 V AC
65/65
55/55
35/26
25/20
20/10
65/65
55/55
35/26
25/20
20/10
65/35
55/28
35/26
25/20
20/10
65/35
55/28
35/26
25/20
20/10
Up to 250 V
DC
Up to 500 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
30/30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Technical data
11.2 Technical overview
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
134 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
High breaking capacity VL160X, VL160 to VL400
Table 11- 5 SENTRON VL - H rated breaking current (kA) symmetrical (high breaking capacity)
Type
SENTRON
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
IEC 60947-2 Up to 240 V AC
Up to 415 V AC
Up to 440 V AC
Up to 500/525 V AC
Up to 690 V AC
100/75
70/70
42/32
30/23
12/6
1)
100/75
70/70
50/38
40/30
12/6
100/75
70/70
50/38
40/30
12/6
100/75
70/70
50/38
40/30
15/8
Up to 250 V DC
Up to 500 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
30/30
30/30
--
32/32
32/32
--
32/32
32/32
--
32/32
32/32
--
1) For rated currents from 25 A. VL160X in the 16 A and 20 A version cannot be used at 690 V.
High breaking capacity VL630 to VL1600
Table 11- 6 SENTRON VL - H rated breaking current (kA) symmetrical (high breaking capacity)
Type
SENTRON
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
IEC 60947-2 Up to 240 V AC
Up to 415 V AC
Up to 440 V AC
Up to 500/525 V AC
Up to 690 V AC
100/75
70/70
50/38
40/30
20/10
100/75
70/70
50/38
40/30
20/10
100/50
70/35
50/38
40/30
30/15
100/50
70/35
50/38
40/30
30/15
Up to 250 V DC
Up to 500 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
30/30
30/30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Technical data
11.2 Technical overview
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 135
Very high breaking capacity VL160X, VL160 to VL400
Table 11- 7 SENTRON VL - L rated breaking current (kA) balanced (very high breaking capacity)
Type
SENTRON
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
IEC 60947-2 Up to 240 V AC
Up to 415 V AC
Up to 440 V AC
Up to 500/525 V AC
Up to 690 V AC
--
--
--
--
--
200/150
100/75
75/50
50/38
12/6
200/150
100/75
75/50
50/38
12/6
200/150
100/75
75/50
50/38
15/8
Up to 250 V DC
Up to 500 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
--
--
--
32/32
32/32
32/32
32/32
32/32
32/32
32/32
32/32
30/32
Very high breaking capacity VL630 to VL1600
Table 11- 8 SENTRON VL - L rated breaking current (kA) balanced (very high breaking capacity)
Type
SENTRON
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
IEC 60947-2 Up to 240 V AC
Up to 415 V AC
Up to 440 V AC
Up to 500/525 V AC
Up to 690 V AC
200/150
100/75
75/50
50/38
20/10
200/150
100/75
75/50
50/38
20/10
200/100
100/50
75/50
50/38
35/17
200/100
100/50
75/50
50/38
35/17
Up to 250 V DC
Up to 500 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
30/30
30/30
30/30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Further information
For more information, see the following chapter:
Use in DC systems (Page 60)
Section "Suggested circuits for DC networks"
Technical data
11.3 Configuration of main connections
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
136 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.3
Configuration of main connections
Main connections
Molded case circuit
breakers
Connection overview and further options
Box terminals Terminals with
screw connection
with metric thread
for flat connection
Circular conductor
terminal / multiple
feed-in terminal
Rear terminals Front-accessible
connecting bars
VL160X
□
□
x
x
x
VL160
□
□
x
x
x
VL250
□
□
x
x
x
VL400
x
○
x
2)3)
x
x
VL630
x
1)
○
x
2)
x
x
VL800
--
○
x
2)
x
x
VL1250
--
○
x
2)
x
x
VL1600
--
x
--
x
○
○ Scope of supply
□ Optional scope of supply
x Available
--
Not available
1)
Connecting terminal plate for flexible busbar; not for 690 V AC / 600 V DC.
2)
Multiple feed-in terminal
3) Circular conductor terminal also available.
Conductor cross-sections
Type
VL160X
3VL1
VL160
3VL2
VL250
3VL3
VL400
3VL4
VL630
3VL5
VL800
3VL6
VL1250
3VL7
VL1600
3VL8
Box terminal
2)
• Solid or stranded cable;
copper only [mm²]
2.5 to 95 2.5 to 95 25 to
185
50 to
300
- - - -
• Finely stranded with end
sleeve [mm²]
2.5 to 50 2.5 to 50 25 to
120
50 to
240
- - - -
• Flexible busbar [mm] 12 x 10 12 x 10 17 x 10 25 x 10 - - - -
• Connecting terminal plate for
flexible busbar1) [mm]
- - - - 2 units
10 × 32
- - -
Circular conductor terminal
• Solid or stranded cable; Cu or
Al [mm²]
16 to 70 16 to 70 25 to
185
50 to
300
- - - -
Technical data
11.3 Configuration of main connections
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 137
Type
VL160X
3VL1
VL160
3VL2
VL250
3VL3
VL400
3VL4
VL630
3VL5
VL800
3VL6
VL1250
3VL7
VL1600
3VL8
• Finely stranded with end
sleeve [mm²]
10 to 50 10 to 50 25 to
120
50 to
240
- - - -
Circular conductor terminal with auxiliary conductor connection
• Solid or stranded cable; Cu or
Al [mm²]
16 to 150 16 to 150 120 to
240
- - - - -
• Finely stranded with end
sleeve [mm²]
16 to 120 16 to 120 120 to
185
- - - - -
Multiple feed-in terminal
2)
• Solid or stranded cable; Cu or
Al [mm²]
- - - 2 units
50 to
120
2 units
50 to 240
3 units
50 to 240
4 units
50 to
240
-
• With terminal cover;
Cu or Al [mm²]
- - - 2 units
70 to
300
- - - -
• Finely stranded with end
sleeve
- - - 2 units
50 to 95
2 units
50 to 185
3 units
50 to 185
4 units
50 to
185
-
Direct connection
• Direct connection of busbars;
Cu or Al [mm]
17 x 7 22 x 7 24 x 7 32 x 10 40 x 10 2 x 40 x
10
2 x 50 x
10
3 x 60 x
10
• Screw for terminals with
screw connection
M6 M6 M8 M8 M6 M8 M8 -
1) Not for 690
V AC / 600 V DC
2) Cross-sections in accordance with IEC 6099
Conductor cross-sections for internal accessories for terminals with screw connection
Table 11- 9 Conductor cross-sections for internal accessories for terminals with screw connection: UVR, shunt, auxiliary
switches, alarm switches
• Solid [mm²] 0.75 to 1.5
• Finely stranded with end
sleeve [mm²]
0.75 to 1.0
See installation instructions for details.
Technical data
11.3 Configuration of main connections
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
138 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Tightening torques for cables and leads
Molded
case circuit
breakers
Connection type
Conductor
Conductor
cross-section
mm2
Tightening
torque
Tool Allen
key
Connection
screw
VL160X
Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 7 x 17
(busbar)
6 Nm 5 mm M6
Box terminal
Cu 2,5 – 10
16 – 95
4 Nm
8 Nm
4 mm --
Flexible copper
busbar
12 x 10 8 Nm 4 mm --
Circular conductor connection
Al / Cu
16 – 70
14 Nm
4 mm
--
Circular conductor connection
with terminal cover
Al / Cu 16 – 35
50 – 150
31 Nm
42 Nm
5 mm --
VL160 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 7 x 22
(busbar)
6 Nm 5 mm M6
Box terminal
Cu 2,5 – 10
16 – 95
4 Nm
8 Nm
4 mm --
Flexible copper
busbar
12 x 10 8 Nm 4 mm --
Circular conductor connection Al / Cu 16 – 70 14 Nm 4 mm --
Circular conductor connection
with terminal cover
Al / Cu 16 – 35
50 – 150
31 Nm
42 Nm
5 mm --
VL250 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 7 x 24
(busbar)
10 Nm 6 mm M8
Box terminal
Cu
25 – 185
12 Nm
5 mm
--
Flexible copper
busbar
17 x 10 12 Nm 5 mm --
Circular conductor connection Al / Cu 25 – 35
50 – 185
14 Nm
31 Nm
8 mm --
Circular conductor connection
with terminal cover
Al / Cu 120 – 150
285 – 240
25 Nm
30 Nm
8 mm --
VL400 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 10 x 32
(Busbar)
15 Nm 6 mm M8
Box terminal
Cu
50 – 300
25 Nm
8 mm
--
Flexible copper
busbar
25 x 10 25 Nm 8 mm --
Circular conductor connection Al / Cu 95 – 120
150 – 300
31 Nm
56 Nm
12 mm --
Multiple feed-in terminal (2
cables)
Al / Cu 50 –120 31 Nm 8 mm --
Multiple feed-in terminal with
terminal cover
Al / Cu 70 – 300 42 Nm 8 mm --
Technical data
11.3 Configuration of main connections
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 139
Molded
case circuit
breakers
Connection type
Conductor
Conductor
cross-section
mm2
Tightening
torque
Tool Allen
key
Connection
screw
VL630 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 1x 40 x 10
(busbar)
15 Nm 5 mm M6
Multiple feed-in terminal (2
cables)
Al / Cu 50 – 240 34 Nm 8 mm --
Connecting terminal plate for
flexible copper busbars
Cu 10 x 32
(busbar)
15 Nm 5 mm M6
VL800 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 2x 40 x 10
(busbar)
24 Nm 6 Nm M8
Multiple feed-in terminal (3
cables)
Al / Cu 50 – 240 42 Nm 8 mm --
VL1250 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 2x 50 x 10
(busbar)
24 Nm 6 mm M8
Multiple feed-in terminal (4
cables)
Al / Cu 50 – 240 42 Nm 8 mm --
VL1600 Terminals with screw
connection with metric thread
for flat connection
Al / Cu 3x 60 x 10
(busbar)
24 Nm 6 mm --
Front connecting bars
Table 11- 10 Front connecting bars
Dimensions
(mm)
VL160X/
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250 /
VL1600
Width (W)
20
22
30,5
42
51
60
Length (L)
44,5
44,5
81,75
69,75
91,5
102,25
Clearance (D)
10
13
15
15
15
20
Thickness (T)
6,5
6,5
9,5
9,5
9,5
16
inside (∅)
7
11
11
11
13
13
Technical data
11.3 Configuration of main connections
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
140 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
Table 11- 11 Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
Dimensions
(mm)
VL160X /
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
Pole clearance
(P)
44,5 44,5 63,5 76 76
Rear terminals
Table 11- 12 Rear terminals
Thread round terminal
VL160X /
VL160
VL250
VL400
Short length (Ls) mm
66
66
73
Long length (Ll) mm
123
123
131
Thread
M12
M12
M12
Flat terminal
VL160X / VL160
VL250
VL400
Short length (Ls) mm
51,5
51,5
98
Long length (Ll) mm
108,5
108,5
157
Bore hole Ø
11
11
11
W / W / T
25 / 25 / 4
25 / 25 / 4
28 / 28 / 8
Technical data
11.3 Configuration of main connections
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 141
Rear flat busbar terminals
Table 11- 13 Rear flat busbar terminals
mm
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Width (W)
32
50
50
60
Length (L)
66,5
142
142
178
inside (∅ D)
11
13 (2x)
13 (2x)
13 (2x)
Allen key/hex
wrench opening
6 / - 6 / - 6 / - - / 18
Tightening torque
for fixing screw
15 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm
Terminals with screw connection
Table 11- 14 Terminals with screw connection
Molded case
circuit breaker
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
VL630
VL800
VL1250
Screw
mm
M6 x 20
M6 x 20
M8 x 20
M8 x 25
M6 x 40
M8 x 50
M8 x 50
Busbar thickness
T
mm 1 - 7 1 - 7 1 - 7 3 - 10 5 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30
Max. torque
Nm
6
6
10
15
15
24
24
Busbar dmax Wmax mm
mm
6
19
9
24
9
24
10
32
10
42
13
50
13
50
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
142 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.4
Derating factors
The tables for derating factors apply for 3VL molded case circuit breakers used under
difficult operating conditions in the following areas:
11.4.1
Use at altitudes above 2000 meters
Table 11- 15 Derating factors for high altitudes
Molded
case circuit
breaker
Characteristic values
Altitude (m)
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
All
Breaking capacity ICU/ICS
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
Operating voltage U
max
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
Operating current Imax
1)
1,00
0,96
0,92
0,88
0,84
0,80
0,76
Set current I
r 2)
1,00
1,02
1,04
1,06
1,08
1,10
1,12
1)
At max. ambient temperature 50 °C
2) Thermal-magnetic releases only
See also
Use in unusual environments: (Page 67)
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 143
11.4.2
Use under diverse ambient temperatures
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases
Fixed mounting:
Table 11- 16 Derating factors of thermal-magnetic overcurrent release
Molded
case
circuit
breaker
I
n
At 50 °C
[A]
Cross-
section Cu
[mm
2
] min.
Cross-
section Al
[mm
2
] min.
Max. rated uninterrupted current according to the
ambient temperature x In
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C
70 °C
VL160X
16
2,5
4
1
1
0,93
0,86
20
2,5
4
1
1
0,93
0,86
25
4
6
1
1
0,93
0,86
32
6
10
1
1
0,93
0,86
40
10
10
1
1
0,93
0,86
50
10
16
1
1
0,93
0,86
63
16
25
1
1
0,93
0,86
80
25
35
1
1
0,93
0,86
100
35
50
1
1
0,93
0,86
125
50
70
1
1
0,93
0,86
160
70
95
1
1
0,93
0,86
VL160
50
10
16
1
1
0,93
0,86
63 16 25 1 1 0,93 0,86
80
25
35
1
1
0,93
0,86
100 35 50 1 1 0,93 0,86
125
50
70
1
1
0,93
0,86
160
70
95
1
1
0,93
0,86
VL250
200
95
120
1
1
0,93
0,86
250
120
185
1
1
0,93
0,86
VL400
200
95
120
1
1
0,93
0,86
250
120
185
1
1
0,93
0,86
315
185
2x120
1
1
0,93
0,86
400
240
2x150
1
1
0,93
0,86
VL630
315
185
2x120
1
1
0,93
0,86
400
240
2x150
1
1
0,93
0,86
500
2x150
2x185
1
1
0,93
0,86
630
2x185
2x240
1
1
0,93
0,86
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
144 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Plug-in or withdrawable version:
Table 11- 17 Derating factors thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases (plug-in or withdrawable version)
Molded
case circuit
breaker
Release
Thermal-magnetic TM
Coefficient
at
From [A]
To [A]
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C
70 °C
VL160X
16
40
1
1
1
1
VL160 &
VL160X
50
100
1
1
1
1
125
160
1
0,9
0,9
0,9
VL250
200
250
1
0,9
0,9
0,9
VL400
200
250
1
1
1
1
315
400
1
0,9
0,9
0,9
VL630
315
400
1
1
1
1
500
630
1
0,85
0,85
0,85
Example for VL250:
● In = 200 A at 50 °C
● Ambient temperature = 60 °C
1. Fixed-mounted version:
In = 200 x 0.931) = 186 A
Set IR to the next lowest value -> IR = 0.9 = 180 A
2. Plug-in or withdrawable version:
In = 200 x 0.931) x 0.92) = 167 A
-> Calculation of overall derating = 0.93 x 0.9 = 0.837
-> Set IR to the next lowest value -> IR = 0.8 = 160 A
1) Derating factor from the table "Derating factors of thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases"
2) Coefficient for plug-in or withdrawable version from the table "Derating factors for thermal-
magnetic overcurrent releases (plug-in or withdrawable version)"
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 145
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent release + RCD module
Fixed mounting:
Table 11- 18 Derating factors for thermal-magnetic overcurrent release + RCD module (fixed
mounting)
Molded
case
circuit
breaker
I
n
At 50 °C
[A]
Cross-
section Cu
[mm
2
] min.
Cross-
section Al
[mm
2
] min.
Max. rated uninterrupted current according to the
ambient temperature x In
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C
70 °C
VL160X
16
2,5
4
1
1
0,93
0,8
20
2,5
4
1
1
0,93
0,8
25
4
6
1
1
0,93
0,8
32
6
10
1
1
0,93
0,8
40
10
10
1
1
0,93
0,8
50
10
16
1
1
0,93
0,8
63
16
25
1
1
0,93
0,8
80
25
35
1
1
0,93
0,8
100
35
50
1
1
0,93
0,8
120
50
70
1
1
0,93
0,8
160
70
95
1
1
0,93
0,8
VL160
50
10
16
1
1
0,93
0,8
63 16 25 1 1 0,93 0,8
80
25
35
1
1
0,93
0,8
100 35 50 1 1 0,93 0,8
125
50
70
1
1
0,93
0,8
160
70
95
1
1
0,93
0,8
VL250
200
95
120
1
1
0,86
0,8
250
120
185
1
1
0,86
0,8
VL400
200
95
120
1
1
0,86
0,8
250
120
185
1
1
0,86
0,8
315
185
2x120
1
1
0,86
0,8
400
240
2x150
1
1
0,86
0,8
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
146 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Plug-in or withdrawable version:
Table 11- 19 Derating factors for thermal-magnetic overcurrent release + RCD module (plug-in or
withdrawable version)
Molded
case circuit
breaker
Release
Thermal-magnetic TM
Coefficient
at
From [A]
To [A]
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C
70 °C
VL160X
16
40
1
1
1
1
VL160 &
VL160X
50
100
1
0,97
0,97
0,97
125
160
1
0,88
0,88
0,88
VL250
200
250
1
0,85
0,85
0,85
VL400
200
250
1
0,97
0,97
0,97
315
400
1
0,85
0,85
0,85
Electronic trip unit
Fixed mounting:
Table 11- 20 Derating factors for electronic trip unit (fixed mounting)
Molded
case
circuit
breaker
I
n
At 50 °C
[A]
Cross-
section Cu
[mm
2
] min.
Cross-
section Al
[mm
2
] min.
Max. rated uninterrupted current according to the
ambient temperature x I
n
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C
70 °C
VL160
63
16
25
1
1
1
0,8
100
35
50
1
1
1
0,8
160
70
95
1
1
1
0,8
VL250
200
95
120
1
1
1
0,8
250
120
185
1
1
0,95
0,8
VL400
315
185
2x120
1
1
1
0,8
400
240
2x150
1
1
0,95
0,8
VL630
630
2x185
2x240
1
1
0,95
0,8
VL800
800
500
--
1
1
0,95
0,8
VL1250 1000 600 -- 1 1 1 0,8
1250
800
--
1
1
0,95
0,8
VL1600
1600
1000
--
1
1
0,95
0,8
Note
The electronic trip units with order No. supplement (9th and 10th position) Sx, Mx, Lx, Tx, Nx
and Ux have a thermal self
-protection feature that trips the breaker if the electronics
components reach 100
°C.
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 147
Plug-in or withdrawable version:
Table 11- 21 Derating factors for electronic trip units (plug-in or withdrawable version)
Molded
case circuit
breaker
Release
ETU
Coefficient
at
From [A]
To [A]
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C
70 °C
VL160 63
125
100
160
1
1
1
0,9
1
0,9
1
0,9
VL250
200
250
1
0,9
0,9
0,9
VL400
315
400
1
0,9
0,9
0,9
VL630
--
630
1
0,85
0,85
0,85
VL800
--
800
1
0,9
0,9
0,9
VL1250
1000
1250
1
0,95
0,95
0,95
VL1600
--
1600
1
0,8
0,8
0,8
Example for VL250:
● In = 250 A at 50 °C
● Ambient temperature = 60 °C
1. Fixed-mounted version:
In = 250 x 0.951) = 237 A
Set IR to the next lowest value -> IR = 0.95 = 237 A
2. Plug-in or withdrawable version:
In = 250 x 0.951) x 0.92) = 213 A
-> Calculation of overall derating = 0.95 x 0.9 = 0.885
-> Set IR to the next lowest value -> IR = 0.8 = 200 A
1) Derating factor from the table "Derating factors of electronic trip units (fixed mounting)"
2) Coefficient for plug-in or withdrawable version from the table "Derating factors for
electronic trip units (plug-in or withdrawable version)"
Technical data
11.4 Derating factors
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
148 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Response values for minimum and maximum settings on the thermal release
Table 11- 22 Setting values Ir dependent on the ambient temperature (0 °C … 35 °C)
Size
In
[A]
Ambient temperature
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
35 °C
Tripping values for minimum and maximum settings on the
thermal release
min
max*
min
max*
min
max*
min
max*
min
max*
VL160X
16
-
19
-
19
-
18
-
17
-
17
20
22
24
20
23
19
22
18
22
18
21
25
-
30
-
29
-
28
-
27
-
27
32
34
38
32
37
30
36
29
35
28
34
40
43
48
41
46
39
45
36
43
35
42
50
54
60
51
58
48
56
46
54
44
53
63
68
76
64
73
61
71
57
68
55
67
80
85
96
81
93
76
90
72
86
70
85
100
108
120
102
116
97
112
91
108
88
106
125
135
150
128
145
121
140
114
135
111
133
160
169
192
160
186
151
179
143
173
138
170
VL160
50
54
63
51
60
48
58
46
55
44
54
63
68
79
64
76
61
72
57
69
55
68
80
85
100
81
96
76
92
72
88
70
86
100
108
125
102
120
97
115
91
110
88
108
125
135
156
128
150
121
144
114
138
111
134
160
169
200
160
192
151
184
143
176
138
172
VL250 200 216 250 205 240 194 230 182 220 177 215
250
270
313
256
300
242
288
228
275
221
269
VL400
200
216
240
205
232
194
224
182
216
177
212
250
270
300
256
290
242
280
228
270
221
265
315
338
378
320
365
303
353
285
340
276
334
400
432
480
410
464
387
448
365
432
354
424
VL630
315
338
378
320
365
303
353
285
340
276
334
400
432
480
410
464
387
448
365
432
354
424
500
540
600
512
580
484
560
456
540
442
530
630
675
756
640
731
605
706
570
680
553
668
* For TMTUs with fixed setting, the value for "max" applies.
Example for VL160:
The Ir of a VL 160X with adjustable TMTU and In = 63 A refers to 50 °C and can be adjusted
there in the range 50 A … 63 A. At an ambient temperature of 30 °C, these values change
so that the adjustable range for Ir is 57 A … 68 A.
Technical data
11.5 Power loss
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 149
Table 11- 23 Setting values Ir dependent on the ambient temperature (40 °C … 70 °C)
Size
In
[A]
Ambient temperature
40 °C
50 °C
60 °C **
70 °C **
Tripping values for minimum and maximum settings on the
thermal release
min
max*
min
max*
min
max*
min
max*
VL160X
16
-
17
-
16
-
15
-
15
20
17
21
16
20
15
19
14
18
25
-
26
-
25
-
24
-
23
32
27
33
25
32
23
31
22
29
40
34
42
32
40
30
38
28
37
50
43
52
40
50
37
48
34
46
63
54
66
50
63
47
60
43
58
80
67
83
63
80
59
77
54
74
100
86
104
80
100
74
96
69
92
125
107
130
100
125
93
120
86
115
160
134
166
125
160
116
154
108
147
VL160
50
43
53
40
50
37
48
34
45
63
54
66
50
63
47
60
43
57
80
67
84
63
80
59
76
54
72
100
86
105
80
100
74
95
69
90
125
107
131
100
125
93
119
86
113
160
134
168
125
160
116
152
108
144
VL250 200 171 210 160 200 149 190 138 180
250
214
263
200
250
186
238
172
225
VL400 200 171 208 160 200 149 192 138 184
250
214
260
200
250
186
240
172
230
315
268
328
250
315
233
302
215
290
400
342
416
320
400
298
384
275
368
VL630
315
268
328
250
315
233
302
215
290
400
342
416
320
400
298
384
275
368
500
428
520
400
500
372
480
344
460
630
535
655
500
630
465
605
430
580
* For TMTUs with fixed setting, the value for "max" applies.
** For temperatures in excess of 50 °C, the derating factors also have to be observed. (see
Auto-Hotspot)
Technical data
11.5 Power loss
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
150 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.5
Power loss
Power loss for fixed-mounted molded case circuit breakers
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases (TM)
The table below shows the
power loss and the current path resistance for thermal-magnetic
overcurrent releases (TM)
. The power loss applies for In with 3-phase balanced load. The
specified power loss is the sum of all current paths. The current path resistance is only a
guide value and can fluctuate.
Table 11- 24 Power loss for thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases (TM)
Type
Rated current [A]
Power loss [W]
Path resistance [mΩ]
VL160X
16
11
14
20
17
14
25
7
3,7
32
11
3,6
40
16
3,3
50
15
2,0
63
18
1,5
80
24
1,3
100
22
0.73
125
31
0,66
160
41
0,53
VL160
50
16
2,1
63
21
1,8
80
27
1,4
100
27
0,90
125
36
0,77
160 55 0,63
VL250
200
60
0,47
250 71 0,38
VL400
200
60
0,50
250
84
0,45
315
120
0,40
400
175
0,36
VL630
315
85
0,29
400
120
0,25
500
170
0,23
630
230
0,19
Technical data
11.5 Power loss
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 151
Electronic trip units (ETU / LCD-ETU)
The table below shows the
power loss for electronic trip units (ETU / LCD-ETU)
. The power
loss applies for In with 3-phase balanced load. The specified power loss is the sum of all
current paths.
The current path resistance is only a guide value and can fluctuate.
Table 11- 25 Power loss for electronic overload releases (ETU / LCD-ETU)
Type
Rated current [A]
Power loss [W]
Path resistance [mΩ]
VL160
63
7
0,59
100
16
0,53
160
40
0,52
VL250
200
42
0,35
250
60
0,32
VL400
315
60
0,2
400
90
0,19
VL630
630
160
0,13
VL800
800
250
0,13
VL1250
1000
135
0,045
1250
210
0,045
VL1600
1600
260
0,034
Starter combinations
The table below shows the
power loss and the current path resistance for starter
combinations
. The power loss applies for In with 3-phase balanced load. The specified power
loss is the sum of all current paths. The current path resistance is only a guide value and can
fluctuate.
Table 11- 26 Power loss for starter combinations
Type
Rated current [A]
Power loss [W]
Path resistance [mΩ]
VL160
63
7
0,59
100
16
0,53
160
40
0,52
VL250
250
60
0,32
VL400
200
30
0,25
250
42
0,22
315 60 0,20
VL630
315
59
0,20
500
118
0,16
Technical data
11.6 Capacitor banks
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
152 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Molded case non-automatic circuit breakers
The table below shows the
power loss and the current path resistance for molded case non-
automatic circuit breakers
. The power loss applies for In with 3-phase balanced load. The
specified power loss is the sum of all current paths. The current path resistance is only a
guide value and can fluctuate.
Table 11- 27 Power loss for molded case circuit breakers
Type
Rated current [A]
Power loss [W]
Path resistance [mΩ]
VL160X
100
13
0,43
160
34
0,44
VL160
100
16
0,53
160
40
0,52
VL250
250
60
0,32
VL400
400
90
0,19
VL630
630
160
0,13
VL800
800
250
0,13
VL1250
1250
210
0,045
VL1600
1600
260
0,034
11.6
Capacitor banks
Selection of the molded case circuit breaker for protecting and switching capacitors
This table takes account of only a few typical applications and combinations. The appropriate
selection must be made for all other applications.
Table 11- 28 Selection examples for capacitor protection circuits
Rated voltage
[50 Hz]
Qc capacitor bank
power [kvar]
Capacitor rated
current
x 1.5 = IR of the
SENTRON VL [A]
Upstream 3VL molded case circuit breaker
Type
IR [A]
Ii [A]
230 V
15
56
VL160
50-63
600
30
113
VL160
100-125
1000
400 V
25
54
VL160
50-63
600
50
108
VL160
100-125
1000
100
216
VL250
200-250
2000
415 V
20
42
VL160
40-50
600
40
84
VL160
80-100
1000
525 V
25
42
VL160
40-50
600
50 84 VL160 80-100 1000
Technical data
11.7 Motor Protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 153
11.7
Motor Protection
The following characteristic values in the relevant tables apply for the 3VL molded case circuit
breakers in motor protection with different trip classes:
● Trip class ETU10M fixed
● Trip class ETU30M adjustable
● Trip class ETU40M adjustable
Molded case circuit breakers for motor protection with fixed trip class ETU10M
Molded case circuit breaker characteristic
curve for motor protection with
fixed trip class ETU10M
These
molded case circuit breakers possess
an adjustable overload and short
-circuit
release and a fixed trip class.
They are current
-limiting and have a phase
failure sensitivity feature Communication via
PROFIBUS
DP and Modbus RTU is possible.
Table 11- 29 Molded case circuit breakers for motor protection with fixed trip class ETU10M
Molded
case
circuit
breaker
Rated
current In
Max. rated power of the
motor at 50 Hz AC
Adjustable range
of the overload
protection IR
Adjustable
range of the
short-circuit
protection II
Trip class TC
[A]
[kW]
[A]
[A]
[s]
380 / 415 V
500 V
VL160
63
30
37
0.41-1.0 x I
n
1.25-11 x I
n
10
100
37, 45
55
0.41-1.0 x In
1.25-11 x In
10
160
55, 75
75, 90
0.41-1.0 x I
n
1.25-11 x I
n
10
VL250
200
90, 110
110, 132
0.41-1.0 x In
1.25-11 x In
10
250
132
160
0.41-1.0 x I
n
1.25-11 x I
n
10
VL400
315
160
200
0.41-1.0 x In
1.25-11 x In
10
315
200
250
0.41-1.0 x I
n
1.25-11 x I
n
10
VL630
500
250
355
0.41-1.0 x In
1. 5-12.5 x In
10
Technical data
11.7 Motor Protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
154 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Molded case circuit breakers for motor protection with adjustable trip class ETU30M
Molded case circuit breaker characteristic
curve for motor protection with
adjustable trip class ETU30M
These molded case circuit breakers possess
an adjustable overload and short
-circuit
release and an adjustable trip class.
T
hey are current-limiting and have a phase
failure sensitivity feature Communication via
PROFIBUS
DP and Modbus RTU is possible.
Table 11- 30 Molded case circuit breakers for motor protection with adjustable trip class ETU30M
Molded
case
circuit
breaker
Rated
current In
Max. rated power of the
motor at 50 Hz AC
Adjustable range
of the overload
protection IR
Adjustable
range of the
short-circuit
protection II
Trip class TC
[A]
[kW]
[A]
[A]
[s]
380 / 415 V
500 V
VL160
63
30
37
0.41-1.0 x In
6/8/11 x In
10/20/30
100
37, 45
55
0.41-1.0 x I
n
6/8/11 x I
n
10/20/30
160
55, 75
75, 90
0.41-1.0 x In
6/8/11 x In
10/20/30
VL250
200
90, 110
110, 132
0.41-1.0 x I
n
6/8/11 x I
n
10/20/30
250
132
160
0.41-1.0 x In
6/8/11 x In
10/20/30
VL400
315
160
200
0.41-1.0 x I
n
6/8/11 x I
n
10/20/30
315
200
250
0.41-1.0 x In
6/8/11 x In
10/20/30
VL630
500
250
355
0.41-1.0 x I
n
6/8/12.5 x I
n
10/20/30
Technical data
11.7 Motor Protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 155
Molded case circuit breakers for motor protection with adjustable trip class ETU40M
Molded case circuit breaker character
istic
curve for motor protection with
adjustable trip class ETU40M
These molded case circuit breakers possess
an adjustable overload and short
-circuit
release and an adjustable trip class. They are
current
-limiting and have a phase failure
sensitivity feat
ure. They are also equipped
with an LCD display for indicating the current
and for parameterization.
Communication via PROFIBUS and
Modbus
RTU is possible.
Table 11- 31 Molded case circuit breakers for motor protection with adjustable trip class ETU40M
Molded
case
circuit
breaker
Rated
current In
Max. rated power of the
motor at 50 Hz AC
Adjustable range
of the overload
protection IR
Adjustable
range of the
short-circuit
protection II
Trip class TC
[A]
[kW]
[A]
[A]
[s]
380 / 415 V
500 V
VL160
63
30
37
25-63
1.25-11 x In
5/10/15/20/30
100
37, 45
55
40-100
1.25-11 x I
n
5/10/15/20/30
160
55, 75
75, 90
63-160
1.25-11 x In
5/10/15/20/30
VL250
200
90, 110
110, 132
80-200
1.25-11 x I
n
5/10/15/20/30
250
132
160
100-250
1.25-11 x In
5/10/15/20/30
VL400
315
160
200
126-315
1.25-11 x I
n
5/10/15/20/30
315
200
250
126-315
1.25-11 x In
5/10/15/20/30
VL630
500
250
355
200-500
1.25-12.5 x I
n
5/10/15/20/30
Technical data
11.8 Motorized operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
156 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.8
Motorized operating mechanisms
Table 11- 32 Overview of motorized operating mechanisms
Type
3VL1
3VL2
3VL3
3VL4
3VL5
3VL6
3VL7
3VL8
Motorized operating mechanism
(MO)
x x x x x x x x
Motorized operating mechanism
with stored energy mechanism
(SEO) for network
synchronization
x x x x x x
x: Available
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
Table 11- 33 Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
Type of molded case circuit breaker
3VL1 / 3VL2 / 3VL3
3VL4
3VL5 / 3VL6
Type of motorized operating mechanism with
stored energy mechanism (SEO)
3VL9300-3M_00
3VL9400-3M_00
3VL9600-3M_00
Power consumption
[VA / W]
< 100
< 200
< 250
Rated control supply
voltage Us
50 / 60 Hz [V AC]
42 … 48 / 60 / 110 … 127 / 220 … 250
DC [V]
24 / 42 … 48 / 60 / 110 … 127 / 220 … 250
NEOZED fuse
(performance class gG,
characteristic slow)
24 V
9 A
42 / 60 V
4 A
110 / 250 V
2 A
Miniature circuit breaker
(C characteristic in
accordance with
DIN VDE 0641)
24 V
6 A
42 / 60 V
4 A
110 / 250 V 2 A
Operating range
[V]
0.85 … 1.1 x U
s
Min. command duration at
Us
[ms] 50
Max. command duration,
connection-dependent
1)
— Jog or continuous command
Total closing time
[ms]
< 100
OFF time
[s]
< 5
Interval between the
commands OFF and ON
[s] > 5
Interval between the
commands ON and OFF
[s] > 1
Max. permissible switching
frequency
[1/h] 120 60
1) Note the idle times between ON and OFF.
Technical data
11.8 Motorized operating mechanisms
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 157
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Table 11- 34 Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Type of molded case circuit breaker
3VL1
3VL2 / 3VL3
3VL4
3VL5 / 3VL6
3VL7 / 3VL8
Type of motorized operating mechanism
(MO)
3VL9100-
3M_10
3VL9300-
3M_10
3VL9400-
3M_10
3VL9600-
3M_10
3VL9800-
3M_10
Power consumption [VA / W] < 100 < 150
Rated control supply
voltage Us
50 / 60 Hz [V AC]
42 … 60 / 110 … 127 / 220 … 250
DC [V]
24 / 42 … 60 / 110 … 127 / 220 … 250
NEOZED fuse
(performance class
gL /gG)
24 V
6 A
42 … 60 V
6 A
110 V
4 A
220 V
2 A
Miniature circuit
breaker
(C characteristic in
accordance with
DIN VDE 0641)
1)
24 V
C 6 A
42 … 60 V
C 6 A
110 V
C 4 A
220 V C 2 A
Operating range
[V]
0.85 … 1.1 x Us
Min. command duration
at U
s
[ms] 50
Max. command
duration, connection-
dependent
1)
— Jog or continuous command
Total closing time [s] < 1
OFF time
[s]
< 1
Interval between the
commands OFF and
ON
[s] ≥ 10
Interval between the
commands ON and
OFF
[s] ≥ 10
Max. permissible
switching frequency
[1 / h] 120 30
Switching capacity of
the floating contact
(switch position of the
mode selector)
— 16 A / 250 V AC; 0.4 A / 125 V DC; 0.2 A / 250 V DC
(Switching capacity in accordance with UL 1054)
1) Note the idle times between ON and OFF.
Technical data
11.9 RCD modules
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
158 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.9
RCD modules
The RCD modules have the following technical data for their system protection function:
Table 11- 35 Overview of RCD modules
RCD module,
molded case circuit
breaker for system
protection
3- and 4-pole
Rated current In
Differential
currents IΔn
Adjustable
Delay time td
Adjustable
Rated operational
voltage Ue
[A]
[A]
[s]
[V AC]
VL160X
160
0,03
0,10
0,30
0,50
1,00
3,00
Instantaneous
0,06
0,10
0,25
0,50
1,00
127-480
VL160 160 127-480
230-690
VL250 250 127-480
230-690
VL400 400 127-480
230-690
Table 11- 36 Tripped signaling switch in the RCD module 1)
Rated operating voltage [V AC]
250
Thermal rated current I
th
[A]
2
Rated making capacity [A]
2
Rated operating current [A]
2
Rated breaking capacity, inductive, cos φ = 0.7 [A]
0,5
Rated breaking capacity, resistive [A]
2
Quick-response backup fuse [A]
2
1) DC rated operating voltage max. 125 V, minimum load 50 mA at 5 V DC.
Technical data
11.10 Undervoltage release
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 159
11.10
Undervoltage release
Technical data of the undervoltage releases of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers:
Table 11- 37 Undervoltage releases for VL160X, VL160 to VL400
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
Operating voltage [V]
Release (circuit breaker trips)
0.35-0.70 Us
0.35-0.70 Us
0.35-0.70 Us
0.35-0.70 Us
Pick-up (circuit breaker can be
switched on)
0.85-1.10 Us 0.85-1.10 Us 0.85-1.10 Us 0.85-1.10 Us
Power consumption
AC 50 / 60 Hz [VA] 110-127 V
220-250 V
208 V
277 V
380-415 V
440-480 V
500-525 V
600 V
1,5
1,5
1,8
2,1
1,6
1,8
2,05
2,4
1,5
1,5
1,8
2,1
1,6
1,8
2,05
2,4
1,5
1,5
1,8
2,1
1,6
1,8
2,05
2,4
1,5
1,5
1,8
2,1
1,6
1,8
2,05
2,4
DC [W] 12 V
24 V
48 V
60 V
110-127 V
220-250 V
0,75
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,75
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,75
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,75
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
Max. opening time [ms]
50
50
50
50
Technical data
11.11 Time-delay device for undervoltage releases
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
160 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Table 11- 38 Undervoltage release for VL630 to VL1600
VL630
VL800
VL1250
VL1600
Operating voltage [V]
Release (circuit breaker trips)
0.35-0.70 Us
0.35-0.70 Us
0.35-0.70 Us
0.35-0.70 Us
Pick-up (circuit breaker can be
switched on)
0.85-1.10 Us 0.85-1.10 Us 0.85-1.10 Us 0.85-1.10 Us
Power consumption
AC 50 / 60 Hz [VA] 110-127 V
220-250 V
208 V
277 V
380-415 V
440-480 V
500-525 V
1,1
2,1
2,2
1,6
2,0
2,3
2,9
1,1
2,1
2,2
1,6
2,0
2,3
2,9
1,1
2,1
2,2
1,6
2,0
2,3
2,9
1,1
2,1
2,2
1,6
2,0
2,3
2,9
DC [W] 12 V
24 V
48 V
60 V
110-127 V
220-250 V
1,2
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,2
1,5
1,2
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,2
1,5
1,2
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,2
1,5
1,2
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,2
1,5
Max. opening time [ms]
80 80 80 80
11.11
Time-delay device for undervoltage releases
The time-delay device for undervoltage releases has the following technical data:
Table 11- 39 Time-delay device for undervoltage releases, 3TX4701-0A
VL160X … VL400
VL630 … VL1600
Rated control supply voltage Us
[V AC / DC]
220 ... 250 220 ... 250
Control voltage for undervoltage
release [V DC]
220 ... 250 220 ... 250
Conductor cross-sections
• Finely stranded with core
end sleeve [mm2]
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• Solid conductor [mm2] 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
For delay time / protective circuit, refer to the chapter "Circuit diagrams (Page 293)".
Technical data
11.12 Shunt release
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 161
11.12
Shunt release
Technical data of the shunt releases of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers
Table 11- 40 Shunt releases for VL160X, VL160 to VL400
VL160X
VL160
VL250
VL400
Response voltage:
Pick-up (circuit breaker
trips) [V]
0.7-1.10 Us 0.7-1.10 Us 0.7-1.10 Us 0.7-1.10 Us
Power consumption
AC 50 / 60 Hz [VA]
24
480
480
480
480
48-60 V
401 - 501
401 - 501
401 - 501
401 - 501
110-127 V
424 - 489
424 - 489
424 - 489
424 - 489
208-277 V
533 - 736
533 - 736
533 - 736
533 - 736
380-600 V
408 - 645
408 - 645
408 - 645
408 - 645
DC [W]
24 V
594
594
594
594
48 - 60 V
740 - 925
740 - 925
740 - 925
740 - 925
110 - 127 V
559 - 648
559 - 648
559 - 648
559 - 648
220 - 250 V
722 - 820
722 - 820
722 - 820
722 - 820
Max. in-service period [s]
Interrupts automatically
Max. opening time [ms]
20
20
20
20
Fuse (slow)
[A]
Molded case circuit breaker,
[A]
C characteristic
4
(AC 24, 48-60, 110-127 V, 208-277 V)
2
(all others)
5
Note
The power consumption of the shunt releases for approx. 20 ms should be taken into
account when selecting the power supply for the contro
l circuit, for example by means of a
corresponding short
-time overload capability of the power supply used.
Technical data
11.12 Shunt release
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
162 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Table 11- 41 Shunt release for VL630 to VL1600
VL630
VL800
VL1200
VL1600
Response voltage:
Pick-up (circuit breaker
trips) [V]
0.7-1.10 Us 0.7-1.10 Us 0.7-1.10 Us 0.7-1.10 Us
Power consumption
AC 50 / 60 Hz [VA]
24
480
480
480
480
48-60 V
401 - 501
401 - 501
401 - 501
401 - 501
110-127 V
424 - 489
424 - 489
424 - 489
424 - 489
208-277 V
533 - 736
533 - 736
533 - 736
533 - 736
380-600 V
408 - 645
408 - 645
408 - 645
408 - 645
DC [W]
24 V
594
594
594
594
48-60 V
740 - 925
740 - 925
740 - 925
740 - 925
110-127 V
559 - 648
559 - 648
559 - 648
559 - 648
220-250 V
722 - 820
722 - 820
722 - 820
722 - 820
Max. in-service period [s]
Interrupts automatically
Max. opening time [ms]
20
20
20
20
Fuse (slow)
[A]
Molded case circuit breaker,
[A]
C characteristic
4
(AC 24, 48-60, 110-127 V, 208-277 V)
2
(all others)
5
Note
The power consumption
of the shunt releases for approx. 20 ms should be taken into
account when selecting the power supply for the control circuit, for example by means of a
corresponding short
-time overload capability of the power supply used.
Technical data
11.13 Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 163
11.13
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Technical data of the auxiliary and alarm switches of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers:
Table 11- 42 Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Technical data
Rated insulation voltage U
i
with degree of pollution in accordance with IEC 60947-1
400 V
Class 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
6 kV
Conventional thermal current I
th
10 A
Rated operating current I
e
Rated operating voltage U
e
• Alternating current 50 / 60 Hz, AC-12
at Ue
24 V
48 V
110 V
230 V
400 V
600 V
Ie
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
• Alternating current 50 / 60 Hz, AC-15 at Ue
24 V
48 V
110 V
230 V
400 V
600 V
Ie
6 A
6 A
6 A
6 A
3 A
1 A
• Direct current, DC-12 at Ue
24 V
48 V
110 V
230 V
Ie
10 A
5 A
2.5 A
1 A
• Direct current, DC-13 at Ue
24 V
48 V
110 V
230 V
Ie
3 A
1.5 A
0.7 A
0.3 A
Contact reliability
Test voltage/test current
5 V/1 mA
Technical data
11.14 Position signaling switch
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
164 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Technical data
Short-circuit protection
weld-free in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1
• NEOZED fuse links, utilization category gL / gG
• Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic in accordance with
IEC 60898 (VDE 0641)
10 A TDz, 16 A D
10 A
Conductor cross-sections
• Stranded, with end sleeves in accordance with DIN 46228
• Solid or stranded (metric)
• Solid or stranded (AWG)
2 × (0.5 ... 1.5) mm²
2 × (1 ... 2.5) mm²
2 × AWG 18 ... 14
Tightening torques
• Connection screws
0.8 Nm
Rated voltage
• Switching devices
300 V AC
Continuous current
10 A
11.14
Position signaling switch
Position signaling switch
When a molded case circuit breaker is mounted in a withdrawable or plug-in assembly, the
position signaling switch, which is equipped with a changeover contact, is used to indicate
whether the molded case circuit breaker is in the connected or withdrawn position. Two
position signaling switches can be mounted in each withdrawable or plug-in base.
Figure 11-1 Position signaling switch
Technical data
11.14 Position signaling switch
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 165
Technical data of the position signaling switches of the 3VL molded case circuit breakers:
Table 11- 43 Position signaling switch
Technical data
Conductor cross-sections
Screw-type terminal
0.75 .. 2.5 mm
2
Tightening torques
Screws for cable connection
0.5 Nm
Rated operating temperature
–40 °C to +85 °C
Data in accordance with IEC/EN 61058
Rated operating current Ie with rated operating
voltage Ue
Standard operation
At Ue
250 V AC / 400 V AC
Ie
16 A / 10 A
Rated making capacity At 250 V AC
16 A
At 400 V AC
10 A
Rated thermal current I
th
16 A
Rated operating voltage
250 V AC
400 V AC
Rated breaking capacity
cosφ = 1 (resistive)
cosφ = 0.7 (inductive)
At 250 V AC
16 A
4 A
At 400 V AC
10 A
4 A
Short-circuit fuse (quick-response) At 250 V AC
16 A
At 400 V AC
10 A
Data according to UL 1054
Rated operating current Ie with rated operating
voltage Ue
Alternating current
Standard operation
With Ue, power,
[horsepower]
125 / 250 V AC, 1 HP
Ie
16 A
Flammability
class
UL94V-0
Technical data
11.15 Leading auxiliary switches in front-operated rotary operating mechanism
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
166 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
11.15
Leading auxiliary switches in front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Technical data of the leading auxiliary switches in front-operated rotary operating mechanism:
Table 11- 44 Leading auxiliary switches in front-operated rotary operating mechanism
Rated operating voltage [V] AC
230
Thermal rated current I
th
[A]
2
Rated making/breaking capacity
Resistive [A]
2
Inductive [A] cos φ = 0.7
0,5
Rated operating voltage [V] AC
230
Rated operating current [A]
2
Quick-response backup fuse [A]
2
11.16
Ground-fault detection
The individual overcurrent releases have different ground-fault detection:
Table 11- 45 Overview of ground-fault protection classes
Release
Ordering data
Ground-fault detection
ETU22 SG, MG Vectorial summation current formation (3-conductor
system)
ETU22 SH, NH Vectorial summation current formation (4-conductor
system)
ETU22 TH, NH Vectorial summation current formation (4-conductor
system)
LCD-ETU42 UL Vectorial summation current formation (3-conductor
system)
LCD-ETU42 UM Vectorial summation current formation (3-conductor
system)/direct recording of the ground-fault current in the
neutral point of the transformer
LCD-ETU42 UN Vectorial summation current formation (4-conductor
system)
Technical data
11.17 IP degrees of protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 167
11.17
IP degrees of protection
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers are constructed with degree of protection IP20
regardless of size and version.
For 3VL6 in withdrawable version, degree of protection IP20 cannot be achieved. The IP
degree of protection is less than IP20.
A wide range of additional accessories is available for the basic version of the 3VL molded
case circuit breaker in IP20.
The accessories listed below are designed to provide a higher degree of protection:
Technical data
11.17 IP degrees of protection
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
168 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
The degree of protection in accordance with IEC 60529 is listed in the table below:
Table 11- 46 Overview of degrees of protection
Molded case circuit breaker
Protection
Degree of
protection
Molded case circuit breaker
Finger-proof
Protected against solid foreign bodies with a diameter
of 12.5 mm or larger.
IP20
Molded case circuit breaker with terminal cover
Protected against access to live parts with a tool.
Protected against solid foreign bodies with a diameter
of 2.5 mm or larger.
IP30
Plug-in molded case circuit breaker
Finger-proof protection against solid foreign bodies
with a diameter of 12.5 mm or larger.
IP20
IP30
1)
Molded case circuit breaker with masking frame and
motorized operating mechanism
Protected against access to live parts with a wire.
Protected against solid foreign bodies with a diameter
of 1.0 mm or larger.
IP40
2)
Molded case circuit breaker with masking frame for
door cutout
Protected against access to live parts with a wire.
Protected against solid foreign bodies with a diameter
of 1.0 mm or larger.
IP40
2)
Molded case circuit breaker with masking frame and
front-operated rotary operating mechanism
Protected against access to live parts with a wire.
Protected against solid foreign bodies with a diameter
of 1.0 mm or larger.
IP40
2)
Molded case circuit breaker with door coupling rotary
operating mechanism
Protected against ingress of dust and water jets from
any direction.
IP65
2)
1)
If the molded case circuit breaker is installed and the supplied covers are mounted.
2) Depending on the degree of protection of the enclosure
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 169
Dimensional drawings
12
All dimensions are in mm.
12.1
VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to
250 A
12.1.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL160X (3VL1) molded case circuit breakers
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
170 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Molded case circuit
breakers
VL160 / VL250 (3VL2 /
3VL3)
Molded case circuit breakers
VL160 (3VL2)
Molded case circuit breakers
VL250 (3VL3)
Molded case circuit breakers
VL160 and VL250 (3VL2 and
3VL3)
Note
The 5.5 mm
extension at each end of the VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit breaker is only
to be observed when using box terminals or
circular conductor terminals (8).
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 171
12.1.2
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3)
(1)
Safety locks
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(5)
Grading for cover
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
VL160X (3VL1)
VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3)
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
172 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(1)
Safety locks
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Padlock barrier
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout
(5)
Grading for cover
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
Molded case circuit breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(2)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(10)
Supporting bracket
(5)
Terminal covers
(11)
Extension
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(12)
Center line of operating mechanism shaft
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 173
Molded case circuit breaker with side panel rotary operating mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
174 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.1.3
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
VL160X (3VL1)
242
126
116
222
266,5
138,5
222
116
20
7
27
VL160 (3VL2)
258
130
120
238
283,5
143
238
120
20
7
27
VL250 (3VL3)
263,5
133
120
238
283,5
143
238
120
22
11
29
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 175
Molded case circuit breaker with rear connections – long and short
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(4)
Rear connection threaded bolt (long)
(5)
Rear connection threaded bolt (short)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Rear flat terminals (long)
(9)
Rear flat terminals (short)
Type
A
B
C
D
VL160X (3VL1)
71,5
133
96
182
VL160 (3VL2)
75,5
149
101
199
VL250 (3VL3)
75,5
149
101
199
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
176 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.1.4
Terminal covers
Terminal covers, standard
Extended terminal covers
(1)
Front connecting bars
(2)
Terminal covers (standard)
(3)
Terminal covers (extended)
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded ca
se circuit breakers with toggle
lever)
(5)
External surface of cabinet door
(6)
Mounting level
Type
A
B
C
D
VL160X (3VL1)
96
182
326,5
168,5
VL160 (3VL2)
101
199
343
173
VL250 (3VL3) 101 199 343 173
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 177
12.1.5
Locking device for the toggle lever
12.1.6
Rear interlocking module
Rear interlocking module for plug-in / withdrawable molded case circuit breakers, with front
connection, with/without RCD module (withdrawable module only without RCD module)
For other detailed dimension drawings, please refer to the mounting instructions for the rear
interlocking module.
Type
A
Without RCD module VL160X (3VL1),
VL160 (3VL2),
VL250 (3VL3)
194
With RCD module – "plug-in
version" only
VL160X (3VL1),
VL160 (3VL2),
VL250 (3VL3)
315
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
178 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Rear interlocking module
12.1.7
Accessories
Molded case circuit breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit
breakers with toggle lever
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit
breakers with operating mechanism
(3)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit break
ers with operating
mechanism)
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 179
12.1.8
Door cutouts
Door cutout
Toggle lever
(without masking frame)
Door cutout
Front-operated rotary operating
mechanism and motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy
mechanism
(without masking frame)
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism, motorized
operating mechanism
with stored energy mechanism and
extended escutcheon
(with masking frame)
Drilling template and cutout for plug-in
base
with connecting bars on rear
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and the door hinge.
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
180 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Drilling template and cutout for rear connection
Door hinge point (see arrow)
D > A from table + (P x 5)
Type
A
B
C
D
VL160X (3VL1)
114,5
65
71,5
133
VL160 (3VL2)
131,5
65
75,5
149
VL250 (3VL3)
131,5
65
75,5
149
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only
100
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized operating mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
200
Molded case circuit breaker + withdrawable version
200
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 181
12.1.9
Plug-in base and accessories
Plug-in base with front connecting bars and drilling template for plug-in base with front connecting
bars
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9)
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front
(10)
Phase barriers
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
182 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Plug-in base with flat rear terminals
(1)
Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Plug-in base with flat rear terminals
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 183
12.1.10
VL160X (3VL1), 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
12.1.10.1
Plug-in base and accessories
VL160X (3VL1) molded case circuit breaker with motorized
operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism,
mounted on plug-in base
VL160X (3VL1) molded case circuit breaker with front-
operated rotary operating mechanism mounted on plug-in
base
VL160X (3VL1) molded case circuit breaker with motorized
operating mechanism mounted on plug-in base
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(2)
Plug-in base
(7)
Mounting level
(3)
Molded case circuit breakers
(8)
Motorized operating mechan
ism with
stored energy mechanism
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for
molded case circuit breakers with
operating mechanism)
(9)
Front
-operated rotary operating
mechanism
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
184 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Connection adapter 90° angle
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 185
12.1.11
VL160 (3VL) and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
12.1.11.1
Withdrawable version and accessories
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with motorized operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism (connected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with motorized operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism (disconnected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with motorized operating mechanism (connected
position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with motorized operating mechanism
(disconnected position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
186 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(connected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(disconnected position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded
case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 187
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with extended escutcheon (connected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with extended escutcheon (disconnected position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker
(4)
Masking fram
e for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Extended escutcheon
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.1 VL160X (3VL1), VL160 (3VL2), and VL250 (3VL3), 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
188 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Extended escutcheon installation dimensions
Withdrawable version installation dimensions
(4) Masking fram
e for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(8) Extended escutcheon
(11) Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 189
12.2
VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
12.2.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker
(9)
Toggle lever extension
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
190 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.2.2
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
(1)
Safety lock
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(7)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(8)
Mounting level
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Figure 12-1 Front view and side view of the MO 3VL4 motorized operating mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 191
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(1)
Safety lock
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Padlock barrier
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(8)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
192 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Molded case circuit breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(11)
Supporting bracket
(12)
Center line of operating mechanism shaft
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 193
Molded case circuit breaker with side panel rotary operating mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
194 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.2.3
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
(4)
Rear connection (long)
(8)
Rear flat terminals (long)
(5)
Rear connection (short)
(9)
Rear flat terminals (short)
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 195
12.2.4
Terminal covers
Table 12- 1
Molded case circuit breaker installation note
Front connecting bars
(2)
Front connecting bars
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
(8)
Cutout
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
196 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.2.5
Rear interlocking module
Table 12- 2
Rear interlocking module for plug-in/withdrawable circuit
breakers for front connection, with/without RCD module
Rear interlocking module
For other detailed dimension drawings, please refer to the
mounting instructions for the rear interlocking module.
Type
A
Without RCD module VL400 (3VL4)
289
With RCD module VL400 (3VL4)
449
12.2.6
Locking devices, locking device for toggle lever and accessories
Table 12- 3
Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
3VL9 4
20,3
80,3
57,4
52,8
49,3
49,8
6,35
6,3
11,2
58,5
3VL9 6
21,6
79,8
71,1
62,0
50,4
46,5
12,9
8,9
8,6
72,2
3VL9 8
21,6
110,5
88,9
96,5
77,2
69,1
11,7
5,1
24,8
90,0
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 197
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
198 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.2.7
Door cutouts
Table 12- 4
Door cutout toggle lever operating
mechanism
(without masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism and motorized
operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism
(without masking frame)
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Door cutout toggle lever operating
mechanism
(with masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism, motorized
operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism and extended
escutcheon
(with masking frame)
Drilling template and cutout for plug-in
base with flat connecting bars on rear
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 199
Drilling template and cutout for rear connection
Door hinge point (see arrow)
Note
Door c
utouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and the door hinge.
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only
150
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating
mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized
operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
150
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated
rotary operating mechanism
200
Molded case circuit breaker + withdrawable version
200
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
200 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.2.8
Plug-in base and accessories
Plug-in base and drilling template; plug-in base with front connecting bars
(2)
Plug-in base
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9)
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front
(10)
Interphase barrier
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 201
(1)
Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Plug-in base with rear flat connecting bars
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
202 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Table 12- 5
3VL4 circuit breaker in the withdrawable unit (connected
position)
3VL4 circuit breaker in the withdrawable unit (disconnected
position)
Withdrawable module motorized operating mechanism with
stored energy mechanism (connected position)
Withdrawable module motorized operating mechanism with
stored energy mechanism (disconnected position)
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 203
Withdrawable module motorized operating mechanism
(connected position)
Withdrawable module motorized operating mechanism
(disconnected position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit brea
kers with operating
mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
204 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Table 12- 6
Withdrawable module extended escutcheon (connected
position)
Withdrawable module extended escutcheon (disconnected
position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Extended escutcheon
(9)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.2 VL400 (3VL4), 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 205
Extended escutcheon mounted on guide rail
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
206 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.3
VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
12.3.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 207
12.3.2
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
VL630 (3VL5)
(1) Safety lock (7) Motorized operating mechanism with
stored energy mechanism
(4) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with
operating mechanism)
(8) Mounting level
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
208 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
VL630 (3VL5) and VL800 (3VL6)
Figure 12-2 New_front view and side view of the 3VL5 and 3VL6 motorized operating mechanisms
(MO)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(1)
Safety lock
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Padlock barrier
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(5)
Grading for cover
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(8)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 209
Molded case circuit breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(12)
Supporting bracket
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
210 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Molded case circuit breaker with side panel rotary operating mechanism
12.3.3
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(7)
Mounting level
(2) Front connecting bars (8) Front connecting bars for increased pole
spacing
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 211
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(5)
Rear connection (vertical connection)
(4)
Rear connection (horizontal connection)
(7)
Mounting level
12.3.4
Terminal covers
(2)
Front connecting bars
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
212 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.3.5
Rear interlocking module
Rear interlocking module for plug-in/withdrawable molded case circuit breakers for front connection
Rear interlocking module for plug-in/withdrawable molded case circuit breakers for front
connection.
Rear interlocking module
(1)
For withdrawable module
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 213
12.3.6
Locking and locking device for toggle lever
Table 12- 7
Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
3VL9 4
20,3
80,3
57,4
52,8
49,3
49,8
6,35
6,3
11,2
58,5
3VL9 6
21,6
79,8
71,1
62,0
50,4
46,5
12,9
8,9
8,6
72,2
3VL9 8
21,6
110,5
88,9
96,5
77,2
69,1
11,7
5,1
24,8
90,0
12.3.7
Accessories
Masking frames for door cutouts
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit
breakers with toggle lever
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit
breakers with operating mechanism
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(11)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
214 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Toggle lever extension
(4)
Toggle lever extension
(7)
Mounting level
12.3.8
Door cutouts
Door cutout door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Door cutout toggle lever operating mechanism
(without masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary operating
mechanism, motorized operating mechanism with
stored energy mechanism and extended
escutcheon
(without masking frame)
Door cutout toggle lever operating mechanism
(with masking frame)
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and the door hinge.
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 215
Door cutout front-operated rotary operating mechanism,
motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism and extended escutcheon
(with masking frame)
Door hinge point (see arrow)
D > A from table + (P x 5)
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only 150
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism
150
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated rotary operating mechanism
200
Molded case circuit breaker + withdrawable version
200
Table 12- 8
Drilling template and cutout for plug-in base
(with flat connecting bars on rear)
Drilling template and cutout for molded case circuit breakers
(with flat connecting bars on rear)
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
216 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.3.9
Plug-in base and accessories
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front and drilling template for plug-in base with front
connecting bars
(2)
Plug-in base
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9)
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front
(10)
Interphase barrier
(11)
Connection surface
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 217
Plug-in base, with terminal covers, rear flat connecting bars on plug-in base
(1)
Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Plug-in base with rear flat connecting bars
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
218 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.3.10
Withdrawable version and accessories
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with rotary
operating mechanism in withdrawable design (connected
position)
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with rotary
operating mechanism in withdrawable design (disconnected
position)
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 219
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with motorized
operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism in
withdrawable design (connected position)
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with motorized
operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism in
withdrawable design (disconnected position)
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with motorized
operating mechanism in withdrawable design (connected
position)
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with motorized
operating mechanism in withdrawable design (disconnected
position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(9)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
220 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Table 12- 9
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with extended
escutcheon in withdrawable design (connected position)
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with extended
escutcheon in withdrawable design (disconnected position)
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with opera
ting
mechanism)
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Extended escutcheon
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.3 VL630 (3VL5), 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 221
VL630 (3VL5) molded case circuit breaker with extended escutcheon in withdrawable design
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(8)
Extended escutcheon
(10)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(11)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
222 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.4
VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
12.4.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL800 (3VL6) molded case circuit breaker
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 223
12.4.2
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism (SEO)
VL800 (3VL6)
(1)
Safety lock
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(5)
Grading for cover
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(8)
Mounting level
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
VL800 (3VL6)
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
224 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(1) Safety lock (4) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with
operating mechanism)
(2) Front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
(6) External surface of cabinet door
(3)
Padlock barrier
(8)
Mounting level
Molded case circuit breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker
(9)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(12)
Supporting bracket
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(13)
Center line of operating mechanism shaft
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 225
12.4.3
Withdrawable version
Withdrawable version with front-operated rotary operating mechanism, insert position and remove
position
(1)
Connected position
(4)
Mounting level
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(5)
Disconnected position
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
226 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism, insert position and remove position
(1)
Connected position
(4)
Mounting level
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(5)
Disconnected position
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 227
Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism, insert
position and remove position
(1)
Connected position
(4)
Mounting level
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(5)
Disconnected position
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
228 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Withdrawable version with extended escutcheon (without masking frame), insert position and remove
position
(1)
Connected position
(4)
Mounting level
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(5)
Disconnected position
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 229
Withdrawable version
Drilling template and cutout for withdrawable modules with
flat connecting bars on rear
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
230 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.4.4
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 231
12.4.5
Terminal covers
(2)
Front connecting bars
(7)
Mounting level
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
232 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Table 12- 10
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(8)
Rear connection (horizontal mounting)
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Rear connection (vertical mounting)
12.4.6
Locking and locking device for toggle lever
Table 12- 11
Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
3VL9 4
20,3
80,3
57,4
52,8
49,3
49,8
6,35
6,3
11,2
58,5
3VL9 6
21,6
79,8
71,1
62,0
50,4
46,5
12,9
8,9
8,6
72,2
3VL9 8
21,6
110,5
88,9
96,5
77,2
69,1
11,7
5,1
24,8
90,0
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 233
12.4.7
Rear interlocking module
Rear interlocking module 3-pole molded case circuit breaker
For other detailed dimension drawings, please refer to the mounting instructions for the rear
interlocking module.
Rear interlocking module 4-pole molded case circuit breaker
Rear interlocking module
(1)
For withdrawable module
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
234 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.4.8
Accessories
Masking frame for door cutout
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit
breakers with toggle lever
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit
breakers with operating mechanism
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(11)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
Toggle lever extension
(4)
Toggle lever extension
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 235
12.4.9
Door cutouts
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating mechanism
Door cutout toggle lever
(without masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary operating mechanism,
motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism and extended escutcheon (without masking
frame)
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and the door hinge.
Dimensional drawings
12.4 VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
236 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Door cutout front-operated rotary operating mechanism,
motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism and extended escutcheon
(with masking frame)
Door hinge point (see arrow)
D > A from table + (P x 5)
(1)
Withdrawable version only
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only
150
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating mechanism 100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized operating mechanism
with stored energy mechanism
150
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
200
Molded case circuit breaker + withdrawable version
200
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 237
12.5
VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
12.5.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL1250 (3VL7) molded case circuit breaker
(1)
Toggle lever extension
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
238 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
VL1600 (3VL8) molded case circuit breaker
(1)
Toggle lever extension
12.5.2
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism (MO)
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 239
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(1) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with
operating mechanism)
(4) External surface of cabinet door
(2)
Motorized operating mechanism
(5)
Mounting level
(3) Front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
(6) Safety lock
Molded case circuit breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(2)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
(4)
Supporting bracket
(5)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
240 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.5.3
Withdrawable version
Withdrawable version with front-operated rotary operating mechanism, insert position and remove
position
(1)
Connected position
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
(4)
Mounting level
(5)
Disconnected position
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 241
Withdrawable version motorized operating mechanism, insert position and remove position
(1)
Connected position
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
(4)
Mounting level
(5)
Disconnected position
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
242 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Withdrawable version with extended escutcheon (without masking frame), insert position and remove
position
(1)
Connected position
(2)
Masking frame for door cutout
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
(4)
Mounting level
(5)
Disconnected position
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 243
Table 12- 12
Withdrawable version
Drilling template and cutout for withdrawable modules with
flat connecting bars on rear
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
244 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.5.4
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(3)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 245
12.5.5
Terminal covers
(1)
Front connecting bars
(3)
Terminal covers (extended)
(4)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
246 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
VL1250 (3VL7) molded case circuit breakers only
(2)
Terminal covers (short) – for VL1250 (3VL7) molded case circuit breakers only
(4)
Mounting level
(5)
Rear connection (horizontal mounting)
(6)
Rear connection (vertical mounting)
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 247
VL1600 (3VL8) molded case circuit breakers only
(1)
Front connecting bars
(2)
Terminal covers (short) – for VL1250 (3VL7) molded case circuit breakers only
(3)
Terminal covers (extended)
(4)
Mounting level
(5)
Rear connection (horizontal mounting)
(6)
Rear connection (vertical mounting)
(7)
Phase barriers
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
248 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.5.6
Rear interlocking module
For other detailed dimension drawings, please refer to the mounting instructions for the rear
interlocking module.
3-pole version
4-pole version
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 249
12.5.7
Locking and locking device for toggle lever
Table 12- 13
Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
3VL9 4
20,3
80,3
57,4
52,8
49,3
49,8
6,35
6,3
11,2
58,5
3VL9 6
21,6
79,8
71,1
62,0
50,4
46,5
12,9
8,9
8,6
72,2
3VL9 8
21,6
110,5
88,9
96,5
77,2
69,1
11,7
5,1
24,8
90,0
12.5.8
Accessories
Masking frame for door cutout for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever
(1)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(3)
External surface of cabinet door
(5)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
250 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.5.9
Door cutouts
Table 12- 14
Door cutout toggle lever
(without masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism and motorized
operating mechanism (without masking
frame)
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary operating mechanism,
motorized operating mechanism and extended escutcheon
(with masking frame)
Dimensional drawings
12.5 VL1250 (3VL7) and VL1600 (3VL8), 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 251
12.5.10
Current transformer
Table 12- 15
Current transformer for neutral conductor for
ground-fault protection in 4-conductor three-
phase systems for VL160 (3VL2)/VL250 (3VL3)
molded case circuit breakers
Current transformer for neutral conductor for
ground-fault protection in 4-conductor three-
phase systems for VL630 (3VL5)/VL800 (3VL6)
molded case circuit breakers
For other dimension drawings (for current transformers for 3VL4, 3VL7, 3VL8), please refer
to the mounting instructions for current transformers.
Dimensional drawings
12.6 Interlocks for VL160X (3VL1) to VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
252 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.6
Interlocks for VL160X (3VL1) to VL800 (3VL6), 3- and 4-pole, up to
800 A
12.6.1
Locking with bowden wire
Table 12- 16
Combination options
3VL93008LA00
3VL94008LA00
3VL96008LA00
3VL98008LA00
3VL93008LA00
OK OK OK -
3VL94008LA00
OK
OK
OK
-
3VL96008LA00
OK
OK
OK
OK
3VL98008LA00
-
-
OK
OK
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 253
12.7
VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
12.7.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL160X (3VL1) molded case circuit breakers with RCD module
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
254 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.7.2
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
(11)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 255
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(4)
Rear connection threaded bolt (long)
(5)
Rear connection threaded bolt (short)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Rear connection, long flat terminals
(9)
Rear connection, short flat terminals
(11)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
256 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.7.3
Terminal covers
(2)
Front connecting bars
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
(7)
Mounting level
(5) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD
module)
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 257
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(9)
Rear connection, short flat terminals
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
(10)
Rear connection, long
(7)
Mounting level
(11)
Rear connection, short
(8)
Rear connection, long flat terminals
12.7.4
Door cutouts
Table 12- 17
Drilling template for rear connection
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Door cutout toggle lever
(without masking frame)
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
258 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Door hinge point (see arrow)
D > A from table + (P × 5)
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and the door hinge.
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated rotary
operating mechanism
200
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 259
Molded case circuit breaker with RCD module mounted on side
(1)
External surface of cabinet door
(2)
Fastening bracket
(3)
Mounting level
(4)
Mounting rail TH 75 in accordance with DIN EN 60715 (to be provided by the customer)
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
260 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.7.5
Plug-in base and accessories
(1)
Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base for molded case circuit breaker with RCD module
(3)
Plug-in base with flat rear terminals
(5)
Terminal cover (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.7 VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 261
(2)
Plug-in base for molded case circuit breaker with RCD module
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(5)
Terminal cover (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9)
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front
(10)
Interphase barrier
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
262 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.8
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole,
to 250 A
12.8.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit breakers with RCD module
(1)
Molded case circuit breakers
(2)
RCD module
Note
VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit breakers:
The 5
-mm extension (total height 307 mm) at each end is only significant when box termi
nals
and circular conductor terminals are used.
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 263
12.8.2
Connections and phase barriers
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
(11)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(12)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
264 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(4)
Rear connections (long)
(5)
Rear connections (short)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Rear flat terminals (long)
(9)
Rear flat terminals (short)
(10)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
(11)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(12)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 265
12.8.3
Terminal covers
Dimensions of lower cover frame "VL160X (3VL1) with RCD block, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160
A", Terminal covers (Page 256).
(1)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
266 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(1)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(2)
Front connecting bars
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with toggle lever)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 267
12.8.4
Door cutouts
Table 12- 18
Door cutout toggle lever
(without masking frame)
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism and motorized
operating mechanism with stored
energy mechanism
(with masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism
(without masking frame)
Drilling template for cutout
rear connection bolts
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
268 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Door hinge point (see arrow)
D > A from table + (P × 5)
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and
the door hinge.
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only
100
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating
mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated rotary
operating mechanism
200
Molded case circuit breaker + withdrawable version
200
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 269
12.8.5
Plug-in base and accessories
Plug-in base and accessories with drilling template and cutout for plug-in base with flat connecting
bars on rear
(1)
Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base for molded case circuit breaker with RCD module
(3)
Plug-in base with flat rear terminals
(5)
Terminal cover (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
270 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Drilling template and cutout for plug-in base with flat connecting bars on rear with plug-in base and
accessories
(2)
Plug-in base for molded case circuit breaker with RCD module
(4)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(5)
Terminal cover (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9)
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front
(10)
Interphase barrier
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 271
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism (connected
position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism (disconnected
position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and motorized operating
mechanism (connected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and motorized operating
mechanism (disconnected position)
(1)
Safety lock
(4)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
272 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and front-operated rotary
operating mechanism (connected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and front-operated rotary
operating mechanism (disconnected position)
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Padlock barrier
(5)
Masking frame fo
r door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating
mechanism)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 273
Table 12- 19
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and extended escutcheon
(connected position)
VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) molded case circuit
breakers with RCD module and extended escutcheon
(disconnected position)
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker extended escutcheon
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Mas
king frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating
mechanism)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.8 VL160 (3VL2) and VL250 (3VL3) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, to 250 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
274 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Withdrawable version
Withdrawable version
Withdrawable version
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker extended escutcheon
(4)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating
mechanism)
(8)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(9)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circui
t breakers with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating
mechanism)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 275
12.9
VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
12.9.1
Molded case circuit breakers
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD module
(8)
Molded case circuit breakers
(9)
RCD module
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
276 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(1) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD
module)
(6) External surface of cabinet door
(5) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with
toggle lever)
(7) Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 277
12.9.2
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD front connection bar
(connections and interphase barriers)
(1)
Interphase barrier
(2)
Front connecting bars
(7)
Mounting level
(10)
Front connecting bars for increased pole spacing
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
278 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(4)
Rear connections (long)
(5)
Rear connections (short)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Rear flat terminals (long)
(9)
Rear flat terminals (short)
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 279
12.9.3
Terminal covers
(3)
Terminal covers (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Cutout
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
280 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(2)
Front connecting bars
(4)
Terminal covers (extended)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Cutout
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 281
12.9.4
Door cutouts
Table 12- 20
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism
(without masking frame)
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Door cutout toggle lever
(with masking frame)
Door cutout front-operated rotary
operating mechanism
(without masking frame)
Door cutout
Door coupling rotary operating
mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
282 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Door hinge point (see arrow)
D > A from table + (P × 5)
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum clearance between reference point Y and the door hinge.
Combination
A
Molded case circuit breaker only
150
Molded case circuit breaker + door-coupling rotary operating
mechanism
100
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism
150
Molded case circuit breaker + plug-in base + front-operated rotary
operating mechanism
200
Molded case circuit breaker + withdrawable version
200
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 283
12.9.5
Plug-in base and accessories
Table 12- 21
Drilling template and cutout for plug-
in base for rear flat busbar
connection
(1)
Plug-in base with terminal covers
(2)
Plug-in base
(3)
Plug-in base with flat rear terminals
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
284 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(5)
Terminal covers (standard)
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9)
Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front
(10)
Interphase barrier
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 285
Table 12- 22
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, withdrawable module, with motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism (connected
position)
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, withdrawable module, with motorized operating
mechanism with stored energy mechanism (disconnected
position)
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, withdrawable module, with motorized operating
mechanism (connected position)
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, withdrawable module, with motorized operating
mechanism (disconnected position)
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
286 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(1)
Safety lock
(4)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(8)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, plug-in, with front-operated rotary operating
mechanism (connected position)
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, plug-in, with front-operated rotary operating
mechanism (disconnected position)
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Padlock barrier
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating mechanism)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
Dimensional drawings
12.9 VL400 (3VL4) with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 287
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, withdrawable module, with extended escutcheon
(connected position)
VL400 (3VL4) molded case circuit breaker with RCD
module, withdrawable module, with extended escutcheon
(disconnected position)
(2)
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3)
Molded case circuit breaker extended escutcheon
(5)
Masking frame for door cutout (for molded case circuit breakers with operating mechanism)
(6)
External surface of cabinet door
Dimensional drawings
12.10 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
288 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
(7)
Mounting level
(9)
Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating mechanism)
(10)
RCD extended escutcheon
(11)
Locking device for the racking mechanism
(12)
Racking mechanism
(1)
Safety lock
(4)
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism
(8) Masking frame for door cutout
(for molded case circuit breakers with RCD module)
12.10
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC71 and 8UC72, sizes 1 and 2
Table 12- 23
with extension shaft
without extension shaft
Door cutout with fixing
holes
(1)
Knob
(2)
Coupling driver
(3)
Cover frame
(4)
Seal
(5)
Door
(6)
Fastening screws, Qty. 4
(7)
Extension shaft
(8)
Spacer
(9)
Actuating shaft of the circuit breaker
Dimensional drawings
12.10 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 289
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC73, size 3
with extension shaft
without extension shaft
Door cutout with fixing
holes
1)
Adjust the length of the extension shaft by reducing the installation depth. Extension shaft also available in 600 mm
length.
(1)
Handle or double handle
(2)
Coupling driver
(3)
Cover frame
(4)
Seal
(5)
Door
(6)
Fastening screws, Qty. 4
(7)
Extension shaft
(8)
Spacer
(9)
Actuating shaft of the circuit breaker
Dimensional drawings
12.10 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 8UC
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
290 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Coupling driver 8UC60/8UC70
Coupling driver
a
b
Wavelength
with tolerance
compensation
+ 5 ±5 x
without tolerance
compensation
+ 1,5 ±2,5 x+23.5
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Handles with cover frame, sizes 1 to 3
1) Lock holder of the handle when extended.
Dimensional drawings
12.11 4NC current transformers for measuring purposes
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 291
12.11
4NC current transformers for measuring purposes
Table 12- 24
4NC51
4NC52
4NC53
4NC54
4NC current
transformers for
measuring purposes
Window openings
For busbars
Number
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
Width × thickness mm 12 × 5
12 × 10
20 × 5
20 × 5
20 × 10
25 × 5
30 × 5
30 × 10
20 × 5
25 ×
25 × 5
30 × 5
30 × 10
40 × 5
40 × 10
50 × 5
50 × 10
25 × 5
30 × 5
40 × 5
40 × 10
50 × 5
50 × 10
60 × 5
60 × 10
40 × 5
40 × 10
50 × 5
50 × 10
60 × 5
60 × 10
40 × 5
50 × 5
60 × 5
For round conductors
max. mm
17,5 ∅
28 ∅
36 ∅
45 ∅
Dimensional drawings
12.12 COM20/COM21 (communication module for SENTRON 3VL)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
292 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
12.12
COM20/COM21 (communication module for SENTRON 3VL)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 293
Circuit diagrams
13
The circuit diagram examples below show the most frequent uses of the 3VL molded case circuit
breaker:
It is not possible to show combinations here. For versions that differ from those shown, the
diagrams must be modified appropriately.
Circuit diagrams are only provided where they are required for improved understanding of
the operation of the device.
HS
Auxiliary switches
AS
Alarm switches
Figure 13-1 Connection diagram for 3- and 4-pole VL160X-VL630 molded case circuit breakers for
system protection with thermal-magnetic overcurrent releases
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
294 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Terminal assignments for rotary operating mechanism, leading auxiliary switch
Q1
Main contacts
T1 ... T4
Current transformer
F1
Tripping solenoid for A1
A1
Electronic trip unit
F3
Shunt release
F2
Undervoltage release
AS
Alarm switches
HS
Auxiliary switches
EBS
Leading auxiliary switch OFF (integrated into the rotary operating mechanism)
EMS
Leading auxiliary switch ON (integrated into the rotary operating mechanism)
HS
Auxiliary switches
AS
Alarm switches
Figure 13-2 Internal circuit diagram for 3- and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers for system and
motor protection with electronic trip units
Circuit diagrams VL1 ... 8 motorized operating mechanism (MO)
You can see the circuit diagrams for the motorized operating mechanism (MO) without
stored energy mechanism below.
The functions of the motorized operating mechanisms are described in the following chapter:
Motorized operating mechanisms (optional) (Page 32)
The isolated contact S3 (terminals 6, 7, 8) is used for scanning the contact position of the
mode selector (switching capacity in accordance with UL 1054: 16 A / 250 V AC; 0.4 A / 125
V DC; 0.2 A / 250 V DC).
With this changeover contact S3, two states of the mode selector can be scanned:
1. Local operation -> "MANUAL" or "LOCAL" position
2. Remote operation -> "AUTO" position
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 295
Manual operation with Allen key
Figure 13-3 Motorized operating mechanism (MO) without stored energy mechanism for VL160X to
VL1600.
Manual operation with pushbutton on motorized operating mechanism
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
296 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Control via control cable
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 297
Control with undervoltage release
S0
OFF (to be provided by customer)
S01
Remote command (to be provided by customer)
S2
Alarm switch (to be provided by customer)
K1
Auxiliary contactor (to be provided by customer)
PE
Protective grounding
S1
ON (to be provided by customer)
-F1
Fuse in the control circuit
-F2
Fuse in the control circuit
U<
Undervoltage release
Figure 13-4 Motorized operating mechanism without stored energy mechanism for VL160X to
VL1600 with undervoltage release
Note
Switching the circuit breaker off automatically
A separate alarm switch contact (7
-8) can be connected for switching off the circuit breaker
automatically. Automatic switching on of the molded case circuit breaker must be prevented,
otherwise after a trip
ping event it may automatically switch to short-circuit.
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
298 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
The contact of auxiliary contactor K1 prevents no-load operation of the molded case circuit
breaker when the undervoltage release "U<" is without power. No-load operations represent
a high level of stress for the molded case circuit breaker. If the undervoltage release is
without power, auxiliary contactor K1 has not picked up. The contact in the ON circuit
(control circuit) of the motorized operating mechanism is thus not closed, that is, the molded
case circuit breaker cannot be switched.
This auxiliary contactor is not necessary in principle when the undervoltage release is
supplied uninterrupted (e.g. pushbutton S01) from the same source as the motorized
operating mechanism itself (e.g. contact 1).
Circuit diagrams VL1 ... 6, motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism, with or
without undervoltage release
Below are the circuit diagrams for the motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism for the circuit breakers VL160X, VL160, VL250, VL400, VL630 and VL800. The
functions of the motorized operating mechanisms are described in the following chapter:
Motorized operating mechanisms (optional) (Page 32)
S0
AUS
S1
ON
-F1
Fuse in the control circuit
PE
Protective grounding
-F2
Fuse in the control circuit
Figure 13-5 Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism for VL160X, VL160,
VL250, VL400, VL630 and VL800, without undervoltage release
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 299
S0
OFF (to be provided by customer)
S1
ON (to be provided by customer)
S01 Remote command (to be provided by
customer)
S3 Alarm switch (to be provided by customer)
-F1
Fuse in the control circuit
-F2
Fuse in the control circuit
K1 Auxiliary contactor (to be provided by
customer)
PE Protective grounding
U<
Undervoltage release
Figure 13-6 Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy mechanism for VL160X, VL160,
VL250, VL400, VL630 and VL800 with undervoltage release
Note
Automatic charging/close
A separate alarm switch contact (7
-
8) can be connected for automatic charging after tripping.
Automat
ic switching on of the molded case circuit breaker must be prevented, otherwise
after a tripping event it may automatically switch to short
-circuit.
The contact of auxiliary contactor K1 or K3 prevents no-load operation of the molded case
circuit breaker when the undervoltage release "U<" is without power. No-load operations
represent a high level of stress for the molded case circuit breaker. If the undervoltage
release is without power, auxiliary contactor K1 or K3 has not picked up. The contact in the
ON circuit (control circuit) of the motorized operating mechanism is thus not closed, that is,
the molded case circuit breaker cannot be switched.
This auxiliary contactor is not necessary in principle when the undervoltage release is
supplied uninterrupted (e.g. pushbutton S01) from the same source as the motorized
operating mechanism itself (e.g. contact 4).
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
300 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Circuit diagrams, undervoltage release and shunt release
"S contat" integrated into
shunt release
Undervoltage release and shunt release for VL160X to VL1600
S01
Delayed release
S02
Instantaneous release for EMERGENCY-OFF loop (if required)
S03 Leading auxiliary contact, e.g. 3VL9300-3AS10 "OFF to ON" in the front-operated rotary
operating mechanism of the molded case circuit breaker (if required)
K1
Auxiliary contactor 3RH11 (if required)
Figure 13-7 Time-delay device (3TX4701-0A) for undervoltage release for VL160X to VL1600
Protective circuit with UVR
(220 V to 250 V DC)
Tripping time UVR
Y2 only
Approx. 3 seconds
Y2 and Y1 bridged
Approx. 6 seconds
Protective circuit with UVR and contactor
Tripping time UVR
Drop-out time contactor
Y2 only 0.8 s Approx. 2 s
Y2 and Y1 bridged
1.2 s
Approx. 4 s
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 301
Circuit diagrams 3VL plus RCD module
Q0
Molded case circuit breakers
A
Evaluation electronics
F0
Closing solenoid with local trip indication and reset
TEST
Test button
Figure 13-8 4-pole 3VL1 with RCD module (3-pole version corresponds, but without N pole)
Circuit diagrams
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
302 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Q0
Molded case circuit breakers
A
Evaluation electronics
F0
Closing solenoid with local trip indication and reset
TEST
Test button
S0
Remote trip (to be provided by customer)
Figure 13-9 4-pole molded case circuit breaker for 3VL2, 3VL3 and 3VL4 molded case circuit
breakers with remote trip unit and RCD alarm switch (3-pole version corresponds, but
without N pole)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 303
Spare parts/accessories
14
14.1
Installation
The following safety accessory parts are available for installing in the 3VL molded case circuit
breaker:
● Masking frames for door cutouts
● Terminal covers / phase barriers
● Phase barriers
● Toggle lever extension
Spare parts/accessories
14.1 Installation
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
304 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Masking frames for door cutouts:
Masking frames for door cutouts are used to increase the IP degree of protection of the
molded case circuit breakers and to better adapt them to the control cabinets. Masking
frames for door cutouts are available for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable molded
case circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms, motorized operating mechanisms
and RCD modules. The masking frames for door cutouts are attached to the door with
4 fixing elements.
Masking frames for door cutouts
3VL9300-8BC00 (front)
3VL9300
-8BG00
3VL9300-8BC00
3VL9300-8BJ00 / 3VL9300-8BD00
Spare parts/accessories
14.1 Installation
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 305
Terminal covers/phase barriers:
Sealable terminal covers can be installed on the input and output side of the 3VL molded
case circuit breakers. They offer degree of protection IP30 for fixed-mounted or withdrawal
molded case circuit breakers in the connected position. In addition, extended terminal covers
provide separation between the phases if uninsulated busbars or cables are used
Extended terminal cover
Standard terminal cover
Phase barriers
Phase barriers provide insulation on the input and output side of the molded case circuit
breakers. They can be mounted in the specially formed slots on the input and output sides of
the molded case circuit breakers. They can be used in conjunction with other connection
accessories (except terminal covers). The phase barriers can be used with fixed-mounted,
plug-in and withdrawable molded case circuit breakers. Terminal covers must be used if the
molded case circuit breakers are mounted immediately next to each other (see the section
Mounting and safety clearances).
Phase barriers
Use of phase barriers
Spare parts/accessories
14.1 Installation
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
306 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 307
Appendix
A
A.1
Table of abbreviations
Explanation of the abbreviations
Abbreviation
Explanation
line
for line protection
motor
for motor protection
starter
for starter combinations
insulation circuit breaker
Switch disconnectors
IR
Current value of the overload release
I
sd
Current value of the short-time delayed short-circuit release
tsd
Delay time of the short-time delayed short-circuit release
I
i
Current value of the instantaneous short-circuit release
Icn
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
TM
Thermal-magnetic release
ETU
Electronic trip unit
Settings of the LI and LSI releases of the upstream and downstream protective devices for
calculating the selectivity limits:
IR
1 x Ir
I
sd
max.
tsd
100 ms
Ii max.
Appendix
A.2 Standards and specifications
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
308 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
A.2
Standards and specifications
3VL molded case circuit breakers comply with:
● IEC 60947-2 / DIN EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660-101)
● IEC 60947-1 / DIN EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660-100)
Disconnector properties in accordance with:
● IEC 60947-2 / DIN EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660-101)
Please contact SIEMENS for additional standards.
The overcurrent releases of the circuit breakers for motor protection additionally fulfill:
● IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660-102)
Network disconnecting device (used to be called "main switch" in accordance with:
● IEC 60204-1 / DIN EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113-1)
Network disconnecting device for stopping and shutting down in an emergency
(previously called "EMERGENCY-OFF switch")
Table A- 1 The following certificates are available on request
Symbol
Name of the certificate
CE certificate of conformity
Type examination certificate IEC 60947
Type examination certificate CCC (China)
Gost
Valid from July 2014
C-Tick certification for Australia
Shipbuilding approvals (GL, LRS, DNV, ABS, BV)
KTL certificate
Fire Safety certificate
Certificate of origin
Halogen-free
PVC-free
Appendix
A.2 Standards and specifications
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 309
VL160X–VL400 molded case circuit breakers that are equipped with a SENTRON VL RCD
module correspond to IEC 60947-2 Annex B.
The RCD module SENTRON VL corresponds to IEC 61000-4-2 to 61000-4-6, IEC 61000-4-
11 and EN 55011, Class B (tested in accordance with CISPR 11) with regard to
electromagnetic compatibility.
The reference temperature for the RCD modules and the 3VL molded case circuit breakers
is 40 °C. The suitability of the SENTRON VL RCD module for mounting on the 3VL molded
case circuit breakers has no effect on the characteristic key data of the molded case circuit
breaker, such as:
● Rated voltage (50 / 60 Hz), switching capacity
● Electrical and mechanical service life
● Connections
● Operating mechanisms (VL160, VL250, VL400)
● Auxiliary switches and trip units
Rated current, see "Use in unusual environments".
In accordance with DIN 40713, the graphical symbols that the internal circuit diagrams
contain only provide information on the type, connection and mode of operation of devices,
but not on their type of construction.
Shock resistance
All 3VL molded case circuit breakers have shock resistance in accordance with the test
procedures defined in IEC 68 Part 2.
Appendix
A.3 Comprehensive support from A to Z
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
310 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
A.3
Comprehensive support from A to Z
For more information, please see the following links:
Useful links
Table A- 2 Product information
Website
The website provides rapid and targeted
information on our pioneering products and
systems.
Link (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage)
Newsletter
Constantly updated information on the
subject of low-voltage power distribution.
Link
(http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter)
Table A- 3 Product information / product and system selection
Information and
Download Center
• Current catalogs
• Customer magazines
• Brochures
• Demonstration software
• Promotion packages
Link
(http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial)
Table A- 4 Product and system selection
Industry Mall
Platform for e-business and product
information. 24/7 access to a
comprehensive information and ordering
platform for our complete low-voltage
controls and distribution portfolio, including:
• Selection tools
• Product and system configurators
• Availability check
• Order tracking
Link (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall)
Appendix
A.3 Comprehensive support from A to Z
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 311
Table A- 5 Product documentation
Service & Support
Portal
Comprehensive technical information from
the planning phase through configuration to
operation. Around the clock. 365 days a
year.
• Product data sheets
• Manuals / operating instructions
• Certificates
• Characteristic curves
• Downloads
• FAQs
Link (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support)
CAx DVD
Configuration-relevant CAx data on
SENTRON is available on DVD:
• Commercial and technical product
master data
• 2D dimension drawings
• Isometric illustrations
• 3D models
• Product data sheets
• Tender specifications
Link (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall)
Order number:
E86060-D1000-A207-A6-6300
Image Database
Free downloads in several different versions
are available from the image database:
• All current product photos
• 2D dimension drawings
• Isometric illustrations
• 3D models
• Device circuit diagrams
• Symbols
Link
(http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/picturedb)
Table A- 6 Product training
SITRAIN Portal
Comprehensive training program to expand
your knowledge about our products,
systems, and engineering tools
Link (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/training)
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 313
Index
A
Accessories
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches, 54
Undervoltage release, 52
Application overview
3- and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers, 20
3-pole molded case circuit breakers, 20
Generator protection, 20
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Function, 54
C
Cable and busbar mounting methods
Overview, 89
Rated operating voltage, 90
Capacitor banks
Combination with the 3VL circuit breaker, 58
Use, 58
Circuit diagram
Intended uses, 293
Motorized operating mechanism, 294
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism, 298
RCD module, 301
Shunt release, 300
Undervoltage release, 297, 300
Connection
Auxiliary conductor connection, 104
Box terminals, 100
Cable lugs, 103
Conductor cross-sections, 136
Conductor cross-sections for internal
accessories, 137
Dimensional drawings, 175, 180, 194, 210, 230,
244, 254, 263
Fixed-mounted version, 99
Front, 139
Front connecting bars, 100
Front connecting bars for increased pole
spacing, 101, 140
Main connections, 136
Multiple feed-in terminals for circular conductors, 99
Network connection, 99
Plug-in and withdrawable versions, 106
Plug-in base: Connection on the back with flat
busbar terminals, 107
Plug-in base: Connection on the front with busbar
connection pieces, 107
Rear flat busbar terminals, 102, 141
Rear terminals, 101, 140
Screw connection, 103, 141
Terminals for circular conductors, 104
Tightening torques for cables and leads, 138
Withdrawable version: Connection on the back with
flat busbar terminals, 108
Withdrawable version: Connection on the front with
busbar connection pieces, 108
D
DC systems
Recommended connections, 61
Selection criteria, 60
Switching, 60
Use, 60
Degrees of protection
IEC 60529, 168
Technical data, 168
Differential current protection
Function, 44
Standard features, 45
Dimensional drawings
3VL2, 3VL3, 185
COM20 / COM21, 292
Connection, 175, 180, 194, 210, 230, 244, 254, 263
Connection with RCD front connecting bar, 277
Coupling driver, 290
Current transformer, 251, 291
Door cutouts, 179, 198, 214, 250, 257, 267, 281
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, 172,
178, 192, 209, 224, 239, 288
Drilling pattern and cutout, 215, 270
Extended escutcheon, 187
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism, 172,
191, 208, 224, 239
Interlocking, 196
Interlocking module, 212, 248
Interlocks, 213, 232, 249, 252
Locking device for the toggle lever, 177
Masking frame, 197
Motorized operating mechanism, 190, 208, 223,
238
Index
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
314 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism, 190, 207, 223
Plug-in base, 181
Plug-in base and accessories, 200, 216, 260, 269,
273, 283, 285, 287
Rear interlocking module, 177, 196, 233
Side panel rotary operating mechanism, 173
Terminal covers, 211, 232, 245, 256, 265, 279
Terminating covers, 195
Toggle lever and accessories, 196
Toggle lever extension, 214, 234
Toggle lever operating mechanism, 249
Unit, 169
VL1250, 237
VL160 (3VL2), VL250 (3VL3) with RCD
module, 262
VL1600, 238
VL160X, 169
VL160X with RCD module, 253
VL400, 189, 275
VL630, 206
VL800, 222
Withdrawable version, 225, 229, 240, 243
Withdrawable version and accessories, 202, 204,
218, 220
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Accessories, 30
Application, 29
Degree of protection, 29
Description, 29
Design, 29
Dimensional drawings, 172, 178, 192, 209, 224,
239, 288
Interlocking, 29
F
Frequency converters
Combination with the 3VL molded case circuit
breaker, 57
Overview, 57
Use, 57
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
Accessories, 28
Application, 28
Degree of protection, 28
Description, 27
Dimensional drawings, 172, 191, 208, 224, 239
Interlocking, 28
Locking device, 84
Function
3VL molded case circuit breakers, 22
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches, 54
Differential current protection, 44
Ground-fault protection, 49
Overcurrent release, 35
RCD module, 48
Shunt release, 53
Undervoltage release, 52
G
Ground-fault protection
Measurement method, 49
I
Inrush
Use, 59
Inspection, 126
Installation
Fixed mounting, 77
Masking frames for door cutouts, 304
Overview, 77
Phase barriers, 305
Plug-in version, 78
Terminal covers / phase barriers, 305
Withdrawable version, 79
Interlocking
Bowden wire, 86
Rear interlocking module, 87
IT systems
Fault situation, 63
Selection criteria, 62
Use, 62
L
Locking device
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism, 84
Motorized operating mechanism, 85
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism, 85
Safety lock, 86
Toggle lever operating mechanism, 84
M
Maintenance, 125
Motor protection range
Trip classes, 64
Motorized operating mechanism
Index
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03 315
Circuit diagram, 294
Description, 34
Dimensional drawings, 171, 190, 208, 223, 238
Locking device, 85
Technical data, 157
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism
Circuit diagram, 298
Description, 33
Dimensional drawings, 171, 190, 207, 223
Locking device, 85
Technical data, 156
Mounting
Minimum clearances, 82
Permissible mounting positions, 80
Safety clearances, 80
O
Operating mechanisms
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, 29
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism, 27
Side panel rotary operating mechanism, 30
Toggle lever operating mechanism, 26
Order numbers, 15
Overcurrent release
Battery supply device, 25
Commissioning, 118
Configuration, 24
Electronic trip unit, 24, 109, 110, 115, 146
Function, 35
LED display, 111
Magnetic, 109
Magnetic release, 24
Menu of the LCD display, 116
Power supply, 24
Setting options, 38
Technical data, 42
Thermal release, 23
Thermal-magnetic + RCD module, 145
Overview
Accessories, 19
Cable and busbar mounting methods, 89
Installation, 77
Molded case circuit breaker, 18
Molded case circuit breaker with/without
communication preparation, 51
Types, 17
P
Parameter
ETU settings, 119
Overload release, 123
Phase sensitivity, 124
Protection parameter for system and generator
protection, 121
Short-circuit release, 123
Thermal image, 124
Time-lag class / trip class, 124
Tripping characteristic curve, 119
Plug-in base and accessories
Dimensional drawings, 216
R
RCD module
Connection, 48
Design, 47
Function, 48
Special requirements, 47
S
Series circuit
Current selectivity, 69
Time selectivity, 70
Zone-selective interlocking - ZSI, 70
Shunt release
Circuit diagram, 300
Function, 53
Technical data, 161
Side panel rotary operating mechanism
Accessories, 32
Application, 32
Dimensional drawings, 193, 210
Interlocking, 31
Spare parts, 303
Standards, 13
T
Technical data
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches, 163
Capacitor banks, 152
Degrees of protection, 168
Ground-fault detection, 166
Leading auxiliary switches in front-operated rotary
operating mechanism, 166
Motor protection, 153
Index
3VL IEC molded case circuit breakers
316 System Manual, 11/2013, 110 0110 - 02 DS 03
Motorized operating mechanism, 157
Motorized operating mechanism with stored energy
mechanism, 156
Overcurrent release, 42
Position signaling switch, 164
Power loss for electronic overload releases, 151
Power loss for fixed mounting, 150
Power loss for molded case circuit breakers, 152
Power loss for starter combinations, 151
RCD modules, 158
Shunt release, 161
Standard breaking capacity, 133
Time-delay device, 160
Undervoltage release, 159
Technical Support, 11
Toggle lever extension
Dimensional drawings, 234
Toggle lever operating mechanism
Description, 26
Dimensional drawing locking device, 177
Dimensional drawings, 249
Extension, 27
Interlocking, 86
Locking device, 84
Positions, 26
Transfer control system
Overview of 3KC ATC5300, 71
Structure, 72
Use, 71
Transformer protection
Use, 59
Trip class
ETU10M, 153
ETU30M, 154
ETU40M, 155
Troubleshooting, 127
U
Undervoltage release
Circuit diagram, 297, 300
Function, 52
Technical data, 159
Use
Altitude, 67, 142
Ambient temperature, 67, 143
Capacitor banks, 58
Communication environment, 74
DC systems, 60
Frequency converters, 57
Inrush, 59
IT systems, 62
Motor protection range, 64
Series circuit, 69
Transfer control system, 71
Transformer protection, 59
Unusual environments, 67
Siemens AG
Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Low and Medium Voltage
Division
Low Voltage Distribution
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Subject to change without prior notice
3ZX1012-0VL10-0AC1
© Siemens AG 2004
Further information
Simply download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/catalogs
Newsletters - always up to date:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
E-Business in the Industry Mall:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall
Online Support:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Technical Support
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
SENTRON
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
